Você está na página 1de 440

These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY.

SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

D84830
Edition 1.0
D82531GC10

December 2013
Student Guide
Implementation Using ODI
Oracle BI Applications 11g:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Author Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Jim Sarokin Disclaimer

This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Technical Contributors other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for
your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or
and Reviewers altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright
Archana Singh law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform,
reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in
Scott Silbernick part without the express authorization of Oracle.
Patrick Block
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If
Mizuru Asada you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle
Jayant Mahto University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This
document is not warranted to be error-free.
Edward James
Restricted Rights Notice
Sireesha Mandava
Deviprasad Kolli If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice
Kasturi Shekhar is applicable:
Robert Davis
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Mauricio Alvarado The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display,
or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable
Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Editors
Daniel Milne Trademark Notice

Aju Kumar Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other
names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Anwesha Ray

Graphic Designer
Rajiv Chandrabhanu

Publishers
Nita Brozowski
Sujatha Nagendra
Contents
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1 Course Introduction
Lesson Agenda 1-2
Instructor and Class Participants 1-3
Training Site Information 1-4
Course Audience 1-5

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Course Prerequisites 1-6
Course Goal 1-7
Course Objectives 1-8
Course Methodology 1-10
Course Materials 1-11
Course Agenda 1-12
Summary 1-15

2 Oracle Business Intelligence Applications Overview


Objectives 2-2
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications 2-3
Oracle BI Applications Prebuilt Components 2-4
Business Areas Supported in Oracle BI Applications 2-5
Enterprise Resource Planning Analytics 2-6
Oracle Financial Analytics 2-7
Oracle U.S. Federal Financial Analytics 2-8
Oracle Human Resources Analytics 2-9
Oracle Manufacturing Analytics 2-10
Oracle Procurement and Spend Analytics 2-11
Oracle Project Analytics 2-12
Oracle Supply Chain and Order Management Analytics 2-13
Oracle Student Information Analytics 2-14
Customer Relationship Management Analytics 2-15
Oracle Marketing Analytics 2-16
Oracle Partner Analytics 2-17
Oracle Price Analytics 2-18
Oracle Sales Analytics 2-19
Oracle Service Analytics 2-20
Oracles Enterprise Performance Management System 2-21
Common Enterprise Information Model 2-23

iii
Analytic Workflows 2-24
Speeds Time to Value and Lowers TCO 2-26
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Evolving Role of Business Intelligence 2-27


Oracle BI Applications: Summary 2-28
Quiz 2-29
Summary 2-33
Practice 2-34

3 Oracle Business Intelligence Applications Architecture


Objective 3-2
Oracle BI Applications Architecture Components 3-3

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Source Systems 3-4
Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition 3-5
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse 3-6
Oracle BI Applications Repositories 3-7
Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager 3-8
Functional Setup Manager 3-9
Oracle Data Integrator 3-10
Oracle GoldenGate 3-11
Oracle BI Applications Architecture Layers 3-12
Oracle BI Applications Architecture: Database Tier 3-13
Oracle BI Applications Architecture: Oracle BI Domain 3-14
Oracle BI Applications Architecture: User Connections 3-16
Oracle BI Applications Product Life Cycle 3-17
Installing Prerequisites and Oracle BI Applications 3-18
Configuring Oracle BI Applications 3-19
Performing a Full Load 3-20
Testing and Moving to Production 3-21
Running Periodic ETL 3-22
Patching Oracle BI Applications 3-23
Administering Oracle BI Applications 3-24
Quiz 3-25
Summary 3-29
Practice 3-30

4 Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse Content


Objectives 4-2
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse 4-3
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse Content 4-4
Star Schema 4-5
Star Schema Example: General Ledger Revenue 4-6

iv
Selected Star Schemas of the OBAW 4-7
OBAW Naming Conventions 4-8
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

OBAW Table Types 4-9


Fact Tables 4-10
Dimension Tables 4-11
Minidimension Tables 4-12
Helper Tables 4-13
Hierarchy Tables 4-14
Staging Tables 4-15
Aggregate Tables 4-16
Internal Tables 4-17

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Conforming Dimension Tables 4-18
Standard Column Suffixes in OBAW 4-19
System Columns in Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse Tables 4-20
Multi-Language Support 4-21
OBAW Currency Preferences 4-22
Quiz 4-23
Summary 4-29
Practice 4-30

5 Installing Oracle Business Intelligence Applications


Objectives 5-2
Review Preinstallation and Installation Requirements 5-3
Preinstallation and Deployment Requirements 5-4
Guidelines for Setting Up the OBAW 5-5
Using a Separate Database for the OBAW 5-6
Using Oracle Template Files 5-8
OBIA Installation Tasks 5-9
1. Create Database Schemas Using the Fusion Middleware Repository Creation
Utility. 5-11
2. Install Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition 11g. 5-12
3. Install Oracle Data Integrator. 5-13
4. Create Schemas by Using the Business Analytics Applications Suite RCU. 5-14
5. Install Oracle BI Applications by Using the Business Analytics Applications Suite
Installer. 5-15
6. Apply Fusion Middleware Platform Patches. 5-16
7. Configure Oracle BI Applications. 5-17
8. Upgrade to WebLogic Server 10.3.6. 5-18
9. Configure User Access for ODI Studio. 5-19
10. Apply the ATGLite Patch. 5-20
11. Apply Patch 16629917 to ODI Studio. 5-21

v
12. Copy Source Files. 5-22
Post-Installation System Setup Tasks 5-23
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Connect to the BI Applications ODI Repository. 5-24


2. Set the Business Analytics Warehouse Connection in ODI. 5-25
3. Register the Source System in Configuration Manager. 5-26
4. Register the Source System in ODI. 5-27
5. Enable Offerings for Deployment. 5-28
6. Edit Preferred Currency Display Names. 5-29
7. Set Languages for Data Load. 5-30
8. Run the Domain-Only Load Plan. 5-31
9. Grant User Access to Configuration Manager, FSM, and ODI. 5-32

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


10. Trim the OBIA Repository. 5-33
Next Steps 5-34
Quiz 5-35
Summary 5-40
Demonstrations 5-41
Practice 5-43

6 Understanding the ETL Process


Objectives 6-2
ETL Phases 6-3
Load Plan 6-4
Oracle Data Integrator Repository 6-5
Master Repository 6-6
Work Repository 6-7
ODI Run-Time Agent 6-8
ODI Console 6-9
ETL Processing: Overview 6-10
ODI Studio 6-11
ODI Studio Navigators 6-12
Prebuilt Oracle BI Applications ETL Logic 6-13
Prebuilt Oracle BI Applications ETL Objects 6-14
Project 6-15
Adaptor 6-16
Interface 6-17
Package 6-18
Scenario 6-19
Variable 6-20
Knowledge Module 6-21
Model 6-22
Datastore 6-23

vi
Load Plans and Scenarios 6-24
Full ETL and Incremental ETL 6-25
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Change Capture 6-26


Prune Days 6-27
Multi-Source Environments 6-28
ETL Application Roles 6-29
ETL Versus ELT 6-30
ETL Process Summary 6-32
ETL Process: Example 6-33
Why Use ODI? 6-34
Quiz 6-37

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Summary 6-41
Practice 6-42

7 Functional Configuration for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications


Objectives 7-2
Functional Configuration Terminology 7-3
Functional Configuration 7-4
Functional Configuration Tools 7-5
Configuration Manager 7-6
Configuration Manager Work Area 7-7
Functional Setup Manager 7-8
Functional Setup Manager Work Area 7-9
Performing Functional Configuration 7-10
Enabling Offerings and Functional Areas 7-11
Creating an Implementation Project 7-12
Performing Functional Tasks 7-13
Changing Task Status 7-14
Assigning Tasks 7-15
Managing Offerings and Functional Areas 7-16
Quiz 7-17
Summary 7-21
Practice 7-22

8 Administering and Maintaining Functional Configuration Data


Objective 8-2
Overview 8-3
Domains and Domain Mappings 8-4
Domain Member Mappings 8-5
Source Domains 8-6
Source Domains: Domain Members 8-7

vii
Warehouse Domains 8-8
Warehouse Domains: Warehouse Members 8-9
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Warehouse Domain Hierarchies 8-10


Warehouse Domain Hierarchies: Domain Member Mappings 8-11
Editing Domain Member Mappings 8-12
Using Batch Edit 8-13
Using Sync To Source 8-14
Data Load Parameters 8-15
Editing Data Load Parameters 8-16
Editing Group-Specific Parameter Values 8-17
Reporting Parameters 8-18

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Exporting and Importing Setup Data 8-19
Monitoring Setup Data 8-20
Quiz 8-21
Summary 8-26
Practice 8-27

9 Managing Load Plans


Objectives 9-2
Load Plans 9-3
Overview of a Load Plan Life Cycle 9-4
Defining a Load Plan 9-5
Generating a Load Plan 9-7
Executing a Load Plan 9-8
Monitoring a Load Plan 9-9
Copying a Load Plan 9-10
Stopping a Load Plan 9-11
Overview of Restarting a Load Plan 9-12
Understanding Restartability Grain 9-13
Restarting a Load Plan 9-15
Restarting a Session 9-16
Troubleshooting Load Plans 9-17
Using Mark as Complete 9-18
Running a Stand-Alone Scenario 9-19
Managing Load Plans: Fact Groups Tab 9-20
Managing Load Plans: Data Load Parameters Tab 9-21
Managing Load Plans: Domains and Mappings Tab 9-22
Managing Load Plans: Schedules Tab 9-23
Resetting the Data Warehouse 9-24

viii
Quiz 9-25
Summary 9-30
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Practices 9-31

10 Customizing the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse


Objectives 10-2
Customization 10-3
Customization Categories 10-4
Category 1 Customization: Overview 10-5
Category 1 Customization: Extending Mappings and Tables 10-6
Category 1 Customization: Safe Path 10-7

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Category 1 Customization: Steps 10-8
Category 2 Customization: Overview 10-10
Category 2 Customization: Required Columns 10-11
Category 2 Customization: Steps 10-12
Additional Customization Considerations 10-13
Understanding the DATASOURCE_NUM_ID Column 10-14
Understanding the Impact of Patches on Customizations 10-15
Using Custom Folders 10-16
Applying an Update Strategy 10-17
Creating Indices 10-18
Using Naming Conventions 10-19
Using Configuration Manager 10-20
Quiz 10-21
Summary 10-25
Practice 10-26

11 Building a Category 1 Customization


Objectives 11-2
Category 1 Customization: Adding Columns to Existing Fact or Dimension
Tables 11-3
Category 1 Customization: Scenario 11-4
Category 1 Customization Steps 11-5
1. Create Custom SDE and SIL Folders in ODI Studio. 11-7
2. Create a Version of the Task Folder to be Customized. 11-8
3. Copy the Preconfigured Task Folder to the Custom Folder. 11-9
4. Create Versions of the Copied Task Folder. 11-10
5. Create Versions of the Model. 11-11
6. Edit the Target Datastores. 11-12
7. Map the New Column in the Interface. 11-13
8. Generate DDL Scripts. 11-14

ix
9. Execute the DDL Procedure. 11-15
10. Modify the Scenario Naming Convention. 11-16
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

11. Generate Scenarios. 11-17


12. Generate a Load Plan. 11-18
13. Open the Generated Load Plan. 11-19
14. Update the Load Plan Step. 11-20
15. Execute the Load Plan. 11-21
16. Verify That the Data Is Loaded. 11-22
Quiz 11-23
Summary 11-27
Practices 11-28

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


12 Building a Category 2 Customization
Objectives 12-2
Category 2 Customization: Adding New Fact or Dimension Tables 12-3
Category 2 Customization Scenario 12-4
Category 2 Customization Steps 12-5
1. Create New Tables in the OBAW. 12-6
2. Import the Custom Tables into ODI. 12-7
3. Move the Imported Tables to the Appropriate Submodels. 12-8
4. Set Properties for the Datastores. 12-9
5. Create an ODI Sequence for the Dimension. 12-10
6. Create Custom SDE and SIL Tasks. 12-11
7. Extend the Fact Staging Datastore. 12-12
8. Extend the Fact Datastore. 12-13
9. Add a Foreign Key Constraint to the Fact Table. 12-14
10. Add a Non-Unique Bitmap Index to the Fact Table. 12-15
11. Modify an SDE Task to Load the Fact Staging Table. 12-16
12. Create a Custom SIL Task. 12-17
Complete the Remaining Steps 12-18
Quiz 12-19
Summary 12-23
Practices 12-24

13 Security
Objectives 13-2
Security Overview 13-3
Tools to Configure OBIA Security 13-4
Security Levels 13-5
About Authentication 13-6
About Authorization 13-7

x
About Application Roles 13-8
Advantage of Using Application Roles 13-9
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Default OBIA Security Model 13-10


Default Security Realm 13-11
Default Authentication Providers 13-12
Default Users 13-13
Administrative User 13-14
Default BI Groups 13-15
Default OBIA Groups 13-16
Default BI Roles 13-17
Default OBIA Application Roles 13-18

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Default Configuration Manager Application Roles 13-19
Default Application Role Hierarchy Example 13-20
Default Application Policies 13-21
Default Settings in the BI Repository 13-22
Setting Application Role Permissions in the BI Repository 13-23
Setting Object Permissions in the BI Repository 13-24
Permission Inheritance 13-25
Permission Inheritance Example 13-26
Setting Data Filters in the BI Repository 13-27
Setting Query Limits in the BI Repository 13-28
Setting Timing Restrictions 13-29
Setting Catalog Object Permissions 13-30
Setting System Privileges 13-31
Managing Catalog Groups 13-32
Viewing Security Setting in BI Answers 13-33
Oracle Data Integrator Security 13-34
Managing ODI Objects 13-35
Managing ODI Methods 13-36
Managing ODI Profiles 13-37
Managing ODI Users 13-38
Quiz 13-39
Summary 13-43
Practices 13-44

14 Managing Performance
Objectives 14-2
Optimizing Performance 14-3
Common Performance Bottlenecks 14-4
Performance Tuning Recommendations 14-5
Tuning Underlying Systems 14-6

xi
Guidelines for Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse Databases 14-7
Using a Separate Database for the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse 14-9
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

General Guidelines for Oracle Databases 14-11


Using Oracle Template Files 14-14
Configuring Base and Installed Data Warehouse Languages 14-15
Minidimension Tables 14-16
Aggregate Tables 14-17
Creating Indices 14-18
Prune Days 14-19
Oracle GoldenGate 14-20
Quiz 14-21

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Summary 14-25
Practice 14-26

xii
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Course Introduction

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Lesson Agenda
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

This lesson provides an introduction to:


Instructor and class participants
Training site information
Course:
Audience

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Prerequisites
Goal
Objectives
Methodology
Materials
Agenda

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 2


Instructor and Class Participants
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Who are you?


Name
Company
Role
What is your prior experience?
Business intelligence

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Data warehouse design
Database design
How do you expect to benefit from this course?

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 3


Training Site Information
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Bathrooms Class duration and


breaks

Telephones Meals and


refreshments

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Fire exits Questions?

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 4


Course Audience
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

This course is designed for:


Technical architects
Technical business analysts
Configurators or developers
Application administrators

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Database administrators

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 5


Course Prerequisites
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Recommended:
Experience in business intelligence, data warehouse
design, dimensional modeling, and database design
Basic knowledge of SQL

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 6


Course Goal
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

To enable students to install, design, configure, and customize


Oracle Business Intelligence (BI) Applications and Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 7


Course Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify and describe the products, architecture, and key


components of Oracle BI Applications
Identify and describe the content of Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse (OBAW)
Install and configure Oracle BI Applications
Identify and describe the extract, transform, and load (ETL)

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


concepts, products, components, and processes related to
Oracle BI Applications
Explore the prebuilt ETL metadata for Oracle BI
Applications in Oracle Data Integrator (ODI)
Use Configuration Manager and Functional Setup
Manager to configure Oracle BI Applications

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 8


Course Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use Configuration Manager to create, generate, execute,


and monitor load plans
Describe the concepts and techniques for customizing ETL
functionality in Oracle BI Applications
Use ODI Studio to customize and extend the OBAW
Identify and describe the security features of Oracle BI

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Applications
Manage the performance of Oracle BI Applications

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 9


Course Methodology
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Subject matter is delivered by:


Lecture and slide presentations
Software demonstrations
Class discussions
Hands-on practices

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 10


Course Materials
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Student Guide
All slides presented during lecture
Student notes
Activity Guide
Hands-on practices and solutions

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 11


Course Agenda
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Day One:
Lesson 1: Course Introduction
Lesson 2: Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
Overview
Lesson 3: Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
Architecture

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Lesson 4: Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse Content
Lesson 5: Installing Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 12


Course Agenda
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Day Two:
Lesson 6: Understanding the ETL Process
Lesson 7: Functional Configuration for Oracle Business
Intelligence Applications
Lesson 8: Administering and Maintaining Functional
Configuration Data

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Lesson 9: Managing Load Plans
Lesson 10: Customizing the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 13


Course Agenda
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Day Three:
Lesson 11: Building a Category 1 Customization
Lesson 12: Building a Category 2 Customization
Lesson 13: Security
Lesson 14: Managing Performance

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 14


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

This lesson provided an introduction to the:


Instructor and class participants
Training site information
Course:
Audience

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Prerequisites
Goal
Objectives
Methodology
Materials
Agenda

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 1 - 15


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Applications Overview

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Oracle Business Intelligence

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to describe the


products and key components of Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications (OBIA).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 2


Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Business Intelligence Applications:


Is a suite of prebuilt business intelligence solutions that
deliver role-based intelligence
Supports prebuilt aggregation and analysis of information
from a variety of transactional source systems
Is built on Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Edition, a comprehensive business intelligence and
analytics platform
Extracts data from source systems by using Oracle Data
Integrator (ODI) and loads it into the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse (OBAW)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Business Intelligence (BI) Applications is a suite of prebuilt business intelligence


solutions that deliver role-based intelligence. Oracle BI Applications support prebuilt
aggregation and analysis of information from a variety of transactional applications, including
Oracle E-Business Suite, Oracle Siebel, PeopleSoft, JD Edwards Enterprise One, as well as
non-Oracle applications. These transactional applications are referred to source systems,
because they provide the underlying data that source analyses. Oracle BI Applications are
built on Oracle Business Intelligence Suite Enterprise Edition (OBIEE), a comprehensive BI
and analytics platform.
Oracle BI Applications extracts data from your source systems using Oracle Data Integrator
(ODI), a data movement tool, transforms that data with prebuilt mappings, and loads it into the
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse. This information is used to populate the analyses that
deliver role-based intelligence that your company can use to make decisions to improve your
organization's bottom line, competitive performance, and business insight.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 3


Oracle BI Applications Prebuilt Components
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications is a prebuilt, packaged suite of


applications that include:
A prebuilt data warehouse schema
Prebuilt extract, transform, and load (ETL) metadata to
extract data from Oracle and non-Oracle sources
A prebuilt Oracle BI Applications metadata repository

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


A suite of metrics pertaining to how organizations measure
performance
Prebuilt application and industry-specific, role-based
analytics and dashboards

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications allows your organization to realize the value of a prebuilt, packaged BI
application such as rapid deployment, lower total cost ownership, and built-in best practices.
Oracle BI Applications offers:
A prebuilt data warehouse schema, Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse, with
associated extract, transform, and load (ETL) metadata and data-movement
infrastructure to support aggregation and transformation for the analysis of data from all
transactional sources
A prebuilt Oracle BI Applications metadata repository to support analysis of the data in
the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
A suite of metrics pertaining to how organizations measure performance that your
company can select from and apply to your particular line of business
Application and industry-specific, role-based analytics and dashboards that are
organized to maximize both industry and domain knowledge, as well as leveraging an
understanding of the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse and its underlying source
transactional schemas for historical analysis

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 4


Business Areas Supported in
Oracle BI Applications
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications are offered in:


Enterprise Resource Planning Analytics (ERP Analytics)
Customer Relationship Management Analytics (CRM
Analytics)

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Oracle BI Applications offerings are covered in more detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 5


Enterprise Resource Planning Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ERP systems provide an integrated set of applications to make


information available across an organization throughout all of
its business areas and externally to its stakeholders.
Oracle Financial Analytics
Oracle U.S. Federal Financial Analytics
Oracle Human Resources Analytics

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle Manufacturing Analytics
Oracle Procurement and Spend Analytics
Oracle Project Analytics
Oracle Supply Chain and Order Management Analytics
Oracle Student Information Analytics

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slides lists the applications offered in Enterprise Resource Planning Analytics. Each
application is covered in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 6


Oracle Financial Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides organizations with information about the key


financial areas of performance, including balance sheet,
working capital, and liquidity
Provides analysis of product and customer profitability,
performance against budget, and on the complete life
cycle of assets

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Includes the following modules:
General Ledger
Profitability
Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable
Fixed Assets
Employee Expenses
Budgetary Control

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 7


Oracle U.S. Federal Financial Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides operational and financial business intelligence to


U.S. federal government agencies to improve
transparency, accountability, and measure results
Track and manage noncredit card invoices paid on time.
Track and manage interest penalties payments.
Minimize delinquent debt amounts to improve management

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


accountability.
Reduce Treasury borrowing.
Includes the following modules:
Budget Summary Analytics
Budget Detail Analytics
Budget Spending Analytics
Payables Analytics

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 8


Oracle Human Resources Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides information about workforce costs, staffing,


compensation, recruitment, learning, and productivity
Integrates data from an array of functional areas and
presents analysis tools to monitor human capital
Includes the following modules:
Workforce Effectiveness

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Workforce Deployment
Workforce Gains and Losses
Compensation
Absence and Leave Accrual
Payroll
Recruitment
Learning

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 9


Oracle Manufacturing Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Helps manufacturing organizations optimize supply


networks by integrating data across the enterprise value
chain
Provides insight into manufacturing operations and
visibility across plants and business units
Integrates with other BI Applications to deliver supply chain

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


information across the value chain
Includes the following modules:
Planning
Manufacturing Execution
Quality
Production Costing
Inventory

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Through complete end-to-end insight into the manufacturing operations and visibility across
the plants and business units, organizations can significantly reduce costs, enhance
profitability, increase customer satisfaction, and gain competitive advantage by identifying and
eliminating low value-added processes without compromising quality.
The solution is also suitably integrated with other applications in the Oracle Business
Intelligence Applications family to deliver supply chain information across the value chain. For
example, Oracle Supply Chain and Order Management Analytics enables better
understanding of problem areas in fulfilling certain products and helps identify unrealistic
levels of sales order fulfillment backlog. When coupled with Manufacturing Analytics,
organizations are able to analyze supply and demand in tandem to identify potential supply
shortages.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 10


Oracle Procurement and Spend Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides views of corporate spending and the complete


procure-to-pay process
Includes prebuilt adapters for Fusion applications,
PeopleSoft applications, Oracle E-Business Suite
applications, and Siebel applications
Includes the following modules:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Spend Analyzer
Supplier Performance
Sourcing
Procurement Performance
Employee Expenses

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 11


Oracle Project Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides project-based analysis of forecasts, budgets,


cost, revenue, billing, profitability, and other areas of
project management
Provides analyses to monitor the life cycle of a project and
make timely, informed decisions at all levels of the
organization

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Includes the following modules:
Budgets
Cost
Revenue
Billing
Funding
Contracts

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 12


Oracle Supply Chain and Order
Management Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Delivers sales orders and inventory analyses that


organizations can use to make decisions across the supply
chain management life cycle
Enables assessment of inventory levels, product fulfillment
needs, potential sales-order backlog issues, and A/R and
DSO issues

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Provides timely analyses related to orders, margins,
cancellations, discounts, and returns
Includes the following modules:
Order Management
Order Fulfillment
Inventory and Logistics
Costing (E-Business Suite only)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 13


Oracle Student Information Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides academic institutions with analytic capabilities to


better align curriculums and operations with opportunities
and competitive challenges in three key competitive areas:
Admissions and recruiting life cycle
Academic records
Financial transactions

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Key performance metrics for recruiting efforts, course
offerings, and the student population provide ability to:
Maximize student recruiting efforts
Shorten time-to-graduation
Improve retention rates
Identify successful and unsuccessful courses and programs
Analyze faculty workloads

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 14


Customer Relationship Management Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Customer relationship management (CRM) systems use


technology to organize your companys business relationships
with customers or clients.
Oracle Marketing Analytics
Oracle Partner Analytics
Oracle Price Analytics

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle Sales Analytics
Oracle Service Analytics

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracles Customer Relationship Management Analytics is a suite of applications that provides


fact-based insight into the entire sales process and into product demand, customer price
sensitivity, and overall pricing effectiveness. It provides a way for your company to manage
and track campaign performance, assess the effectiveness of loyalty promotions and partner
relationships, and track and analyze service center metrics.
This slide lists the applications offered in Customer Relationship Management Analytics. Each
application is covered in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 15


Oracle Marketing Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides timely, fact-based insight into the marketing


activities of the entire organization
Provides information on which products customers are
likely to buy and insight into which products may make
effective bundles
Includes the following modules:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Budget and Cost Management
Sales Campaign Management
Partner Marketing
Event Management
Promotion Management
Lead Management
Customer Segmentation and List Management

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Marketing Analytics provides timely, fact-based insight into the marketing activities of
the entire organization. It provides new levels of information richness, usability, and reach to
marketing professionals throughout the enterprise. All users, from marketing executives to
marketing analysts, get complete and in-context marketing insightinsight that is
personalized, relevant, and actionable. The benefits are faster and more informed decisions
that help the marketing organization optimize resources, reduce costs, and improve the
effectiveness of marketing activities.
Oracle Marketing Analytics provides information on which products customers are likely to
buy and insight into which products may make effective bundles. The nuances of customer
behavior information can be gleaned from transaction history and correlated with customer
lifetime value, churn risk, and customer behavioral attributes to gain insight into customer
clusters and better inform treatment strategies. The ability to aggregate information from
various data sources also allows marketers to calculate, monitor, and build customer
investment strategies based on critical metrics such as customer profitability.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 16


Oracle Partner Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides analyses of partner performance on all key


aspects of activity such as lead generation, sales
revenues, and partner programs
Allows channel managers to assess partner revenue
trends across partner types and tiers to the customers that
they are selling to and the products that they are selling

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Allows sales managers to assess team performance with
respect to lead-to-opportunity conversions, track the sales
pipeline, and focus on key sales opportunities to reach
sales goals
Areas of focus include:
Partner Performance
Partner Programs
Deal Registrations

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 17


Oracle Price Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides organizations with insight into product demand,


customer price sensitivity, and pricing effectiveness
Enables pricing analysts and managers to:
Make insight-driven pricing decisions
Measure pricing effectiveness
Make adjustments or corrections using consistent data within

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


the right business context
Includes the following modules:
Profitability and Policy Effectiveness
Price Profiles and Segments
Deal Desk
Customer Performance
Product Performance

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 18


Oracle Sales Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides sales professionals with business insight


throughout the sales process
Allows sales professionals to drive greater customer
satisfaction, lower sales costs, and increased revenue
Supports key analytics in opportunity and revenue
management, customer relationships, competition, and

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


forecasting
Includes the following modules:
Pipeline and Forecasting Management
Demand Generation
Quota Management
Customer Performance
User Adoption and Alignment

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 19


Oracle Service Analytics
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Provides service center managers with new levels of


insight by unlocking the information value hidden in
systems across the enterprise
Provides access to actionable information that drives
greater customer satisfaction, lower costs, and increased
revenue

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Includes the following modules:
Self Service
Tele Service
Field Service
Contracts
Entitlements
Assets

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 20


Oracles Enterprise Performance
Management System
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Business Intelligence Applications is integrated with Oracles Enterprise Performance


Management (EPM) System, which is a complete, open, and integrated system that supports
a broad range of analytic requirements. It includes three layers of capabilities:
Business Intelligence (BI) and EPM Applications Layer
This layer includes an integrated suite of market-leading performance management
applications. The applications address key strategic and financial performance management
processes, including strategy management, planning and forecasting, financial close and
reporting, and profitability management. This layer also includes integrated BI applications
that can help users analyze data from enterprise resource planning (ERP) and customer
relationship management (CRM) applications, as well as support industry-specific
requirements.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 21


BI and EPM Platform Layer, which includes two embedded layers: information delivery and
BI foundation.
Information Delivery Layer
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

This layer provides a complete set of information delivery and access capabilities, which are
designed to address the needs of different types of users in an organization. These
capabilities include interactive dashboards for executives and managers, query and analysis
tools for power users, scorecard and Microsoft Office interfaces for finance users, and pixel-
perfect reports and mobile support for casual users. It also supports embedded analytics for
business process.
BI Foundation
The EPM and BI applications are integrated on a BI foundation that includes the following:
Common enterprise information model

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Powerful, forward-looking analytics with Oracle Essbase
Ability to integrate data from Oracle and non-Oracle databases and transactional
systems
Enterprise dimension management application, which provides a single point of
management for dimensions and hierarchies across EPM, BI, data warehouse, and
other applications
Predictive analytics engine, which integrates BI with business processes
The BI foundation also leverages key technologies from Oracle Fusion Middleware, such as
data integration, identity management, and process management.
Data Sources
Oracle Enterprise Performance System provides support for multiple data sources. It supports
various databases and data warehouses. These data sources can reside on Oracles
engineered systems, Exadata. Data also can be brought in from other applications, such as
Oracle, PeopleSoft, SAP, and so on.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 22


Common Enterprise Information Model
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A unified metadata model provides consistent information across the enterprise.

PRESENTATION LAYER Role-based views of the


information relevant to users
User roles, preferences
Simplified view
Logical SQL interface

SEMANTIC OBJECT LAYER Consistent definition of business


measures, metrics, and calculations
Dimensions

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.



Hierarchies
Measures
Calculations
Aggregation Rules
Time Series

PHYSICAL LAYER Model once, deploy everywhere

Map Physical Data


Connections
Schema

Across any data sources

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications is built on the Oracle Business Intelligence Foundation Suite. At the
heart of the Oracle Business Intelligence Foundation Suite is a key technology differentiator
for Oraclethe Common Enterprise Information Model. This is a unified metadata model,
which is accessed by all the end-user tools, so every end user and every department across
the enterprise has the same consistent view of information, tailored to their role. As a result,
organizations no longer need to maintain multiple metadata environments for different types
of users. Oracle provides the ability to model once, deploy everywhere.
The metadata model consists of three tiers:
The physical layer enables you to import the table structures of your existing data
sources.
The semantic layer enables you to create a simplified representation of multiple data
sources, creating a logical model of your business in ways users think about it
dimensions, hierarchies, and metrics.
The presentation layer further simplifies this model making the data appear to end users
as a single data source with a single table structure of dimensions, measures, and
derived measures.
This common enterprise information model enables you to define key metrics and calculations
in one place, assuring that everyone has a consistent view of information (tailored to their
role) and assuring alignment across departments.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 23


Analytic Workflows
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Business
Maximize Cash Flow
objectives/
issues

Is DSO on target?
Is DPO on target?

Are overdue balances Are payment terms


trending up? In compliance?

Gain How long is the

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


underlying overdue What is the aging of the
insights due balances?
balance pending?

Who are the customers Drill to due balances by


and the collectors? region.

Drill to overdue invoice


detail. Business Function: Receivables
Role: Director, Credits and Collections
Objectives:
Take 1) Maximize cash flow.
Target collection efforts to
action 2) Control risk in the receivables portfolio.
reduce overdue balances.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Analytic workflows are built around standard paths of discovery for business issues. In the
slide example, a Director of Credits and Collections in the Receivables function of Finance
and Accounting is monitoring the Maximize Cash Flow objective. This objective is composed
of several key questions and KPIs around Days Sales Outstanding (DSO), Days Payable
Outstanding (DPO), and others. Each one of these subsequently leads to more questions
about the core components of the KPIfor example, DSO being on target requires overdue
balances to be on target, customers to be paying in line with their terms, and so on. These
workflows are supported in Oracle BI Applications as standard exploration paths.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 24


Analytic Workflows
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Business
objectives/ Maximize Cash Flow
issues

Is DSO on target?

Are overdue balances


trending up?

How long is the


Gain Drill to detail

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


underlying overdue
insights balance pending?

Who are the customers?

Drill to overdue invoice


detail.

Take Target collection efforts to


action reduce overdue
balances.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Continuing with the example from the previous slide, following one branch of the Maximize
Cash Flow analytic workflow, each part of the flow is supported by prebuilt reports and
navigation that allow users to easily drill down to further levels of detail as required. Because
the application and the supporting data warehouse model and ETL are built to capture
information at the transaction-line level, users can easily drill down from the summary
information to the most atomic level of information. Ultimately this allows the user to not only
monitor progress on an objective, but also to easily navigate to the right information, so that,
in the end, any required corrective action can be proactively taken. Notice, for example, that in
the Take Action area of the workflow, the user is drilling down from the BI Applications
transactional-invoice level report back to the originating transactional application to take
action in the operational system.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 25


Speeds Time to Value and Lowers TCO
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Build from scratch


with traditional BI tools Oracle BI Applications

Training/Rollout
Oracle BI Applications
solutions approach:
Define Metrics
and Dashboards Faster time to value
Lower TCO
Assured business value

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


DW Design

Training/Rollout Easy to use, easy to adapt


Define Metrics Role-based dashboards and
and Dashboards thousands of predefined metrics
Back-end
ETL and DW Design Prebuilt DW design, adapts to your
Mapping EDW
Back-end Prebuilt Business Adaptors for
ETL and Oracle, PeopleSoft, Siebel, SAP, and
Mapping others

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Compared with a traditional business intelligence deployment, which entails using ETL and BI
platforms to build, load, and report on a custom data warehouse schema, Oracle BI
Applications can provide a significant benefit in the value and total cost of ownership (TCO).
The prebuilt nature of the applications, including the data warehouse data model and ETL, BI
metadata, and reports and dashboards, allows significant savings in deployment time,
creating business value in the significantly reduced time frames. Built-in best practices, KPIs,
metrics, and workflows reduce time, ensure successful business analysis, and reduce TCO.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 26


The Evolving Role of Business Intelligence
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

From: To:

Analysts Pervasive use

Historical data Real-time, predictive data

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Fragmented view Unified, enterprise view

Reporting results Insight-driven business process optimization

Analytic tools Unified infrastructure and prebuilt analytic solutions

Browsers Mobile devices

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The role of business intelligence in an enterprise is continually evolving:


Usage is moving from a few analysts to pervasive use across many organizational
functions. This is supported by the use of prebuilt applications that support multiple
roles.
Data storage is moving from purely historical information to up-to-the-minute analysis,
and even predictive data that allows analysis into the future.
Organizations want to bring together formerly fragmented silos of information, often
stored in transactional systems, into a unified enterprise view of their organization.
There is a trend toward using prebuilt business intelligence applications that offer
packaged value instead of building individual reports on an as-needed basis using
analytics tools.
More and more, intelligent mobile devices are being used to access information.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 27


Oracle BI Applications: Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Service & Order Vertical/


Sales Supply Human
Contact Marketing Management Financials Industry
Chain Resources
Center & Fulfillment Specific

Oracle BI Applications

Proactive
Interactive Reporting & Ad hoc Detection Office
Scorecard Search Embedded Mobile
Dashboards Publishing Analysis and Alerts

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle BI EE Suite

PeopleSoft
Siebel IVR, ACD, CTI
DW Schema MS Excel
Other data sources
EBS Packaged Universal
ETL maps adaptors

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In summary, Oracle BI Applications is a complete, prebuilt business intelligence solution that


delivers intuitive, role-based intelligence for everyone in an organization, from frontline
employees to senior management, and enables better decisions, actions, and business
processes.
Oracle BI Applications is a complete, end-to-end BI environment that includes the OBIEE
platform and the prepackaged analytic applications. The platform includes a server and end-
user tools such as dashboards, query and analysis, and enterprise reporting, all supported by
a unified, model-centric server architecture.
On top of this platform, Oracle BI Applications consumes transactional operational data
sources via packaged extract, transform, and load (ETL) mappings and metadata, which load
a data warehouse for analysis. Analyzing the data warehouse, Oracle BI Applications delivers
role-based analysis via prebuilt reports, dashboards, alerts, briefing books, and other
channels provided by the platform.
Oracle BI Applications extracts data from your source systems using Oracle Data Integrator
(ODI), a data movement tool, transforms that data with prebuilt mappings, and loads it into the
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse. This information is used to populate the analyses that
deliver role-based intelligence that your company can use to make decisions to improve your
organizations bottom line, competitive performance, and business insight.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 28


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not one of the key components of


Oracle Business Intelligence Applications?
a. A prebuilt data warehouse schema
b. Prebuilt extract, transform, and load (ETL) metadata to
extract data from Oracle and non-Oracle sources
c. Prebuilt fragmented views

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. A suite of metrics pertaining to how organizations measure
performance
e. Prebuilt application and industry-specific, role-based
analytics and dashboards

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 29


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements is not an accurate


description of Oracle Business Intelligence Applications?
a. A suite of prebuilt business intelligence solutions that
deliver role-based intelligence
b. Supports prebuilt aggregation and analysis of information
from a variety of transactional source systems

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Built on Enterprise Performance Management, a
comprehensive business intelligence and analytics
platform
d. Extracts data from source systems using Oracle Data
Integrator (ODI) and loads it into the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse (OBAW)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 30


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the incorrect statement about the common information


model.
a. It provides role-based views of the information relevant to
users.
b. It provides a consistent definition of business measures,
metrics, and calculations.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. It provides the ability to deploy once, model everywhere.
d. It provides consistent information across the enterprise.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 31


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

EPM and OBIA are integrated on a BI foundation that includes


which of the following?
a. Common enterprise information model
b. Powerful, forward-looking analytics with Oracle Essbase
c. Ability to integrate data from Oracle and non-Oracle
databases and transactional systems

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. Enterprise dimension management application, which
provides a single point of management for dimensions and
hierarchies across EPM, BI, data warehouse, and other
applications
e. Predictive analytics engine, which integrates BI with
business processes

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, c, d, e

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 32


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to describe the


products and key components of Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 33


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Practice

There are no practices for this lesson.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 2 - 34


Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Applications Architecture

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Oracle Business Intelligence

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objective
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to identify and


describe the Oracle Business Intelligence (BI) Applications
architecture and its key components.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 2


Oracle BI Applications Architecture Components
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Source systems
Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
Oracle BI Applications components repository
Oracle BI Applications Oracle Data Integrator repository

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager
Functional Setup Manager
Oracle Data Integrator
Oracle GoldenGate

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Each component is discussed in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 3


Source Systems
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Source systems are online transactional processing


(OLTP) databases that hold the source data that is loaded
into the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW) via
extract, transform, and load (ETL) processing.
Source systems for Oracle BI Applications include:
Oracle E-Business Suite Applications

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracles Siebel Applications
Oracles PeopleSoft Applications
Oracles JD Edwards Applications
Other non-Oracle systems

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The data extracted from source systems becomes the underlying data for your Oracle BI
analyses and dashboards, and includes information about customers, inventory, sales,
marketing, accounts, and other types of data that you collect about your business.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 4


Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (Oracle BI


EE) is a business intelligence platform that is used to
access and present data in easy-to-understand formats,
such as tables and graphs.
Oracle BI Applications is built on the Oracle BI EE platform
to deliver targeted information about your organizations

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


data with Oracle BI EEs dashboards, reports, graphs,
scorecards, and analyses.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 5


Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW) is a


prebuilt data warehouse data model that was designed using
dimensional modeling techniques to support the analysis
requirements of Oracle BI Applications. It includes:
A universal data warehouse design that enables you to
integrate data from different source systems

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Multiple instance support that enables you to use one data
warehouse deployment for multiple source system
instances
Conformed dimensions that enables you to view the data
from different subject areas

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse is a modular enterprise-wide data warehouse data
model with conformed dimensions for data integrated from multiple sources. Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse provides code standardization, stores transaction data in the most
granular fashion, and tracks historical changes. It also supports multiple currencies and
languages.
The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse is supported only on the Oracle database.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 6


Oracle BI Applications Repositories
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications Oracle Data Integrator repository


Contains the Oracle BI Applications-specific prebuilt ETL
logic
Oracle BI Applications components repository
Repository for Configuration Manager and Functional Setup
Manager

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Contains load plan definitions, Oracle BI Applications
product hierarchy, setup objects, such as parameters and
domain mappings, and a list of functional tasks

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager and Functional Setup Manager are described
in more detail in the next two slides.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 7


Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Configuration Manager is a web application that you use to set


up and maintain an Oracle BI Applications environment. You
use Configuration Manger to:
Configure offerings, which are the products you have
purchased (for example, Oracle Financial Analytics)
Configure functional areas, which are the component parts

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


of the offering (for example, Accounts Receivable is a
functional area of Oracle Financial Analytics)
Monitor and manage Oracle BI Applications setup data
Monitor and manage load plans, which you use to perform
extract, transform, and load (ETL) processes
Migrate configuration data across environments using the
import and export options

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuration Manager contains the setup objects for Oracle BI Applications. It provides
administrative graphical user interfaces for setup and configuration. It is the recommended
product for on-going administration and maintenance of functional setup within Oracle BI
Applications.
It also provides a quick review of Oracle BI Applications setup values, and is the
recommended tool for monitoring and troubleshooting load plan executions. Configuration
Manager works in conjunction with Functional Setup Manager to provide guided tasks to
configure Oracle BI Applications offerings and functional areas.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 8


Functional Setup Manager
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Functional Setup Manager is a web application that works in


conjunction with Configuration Manager to enable you to:
Manage and perform functional configuration tasks for
offerings
Deploy an offering and its functional areas
Manage a list of configuration tasks, which you can assign

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


to different functional developers
Monitor task implementation status

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 9


Oracle Data Integrator
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications uses Oracle Data Integrator (ODI)


as its data integration platform.
ODI is a comprehensive, unified ETL tool for building,
deploying, and managing complex data warehouses.
ODI performs high-volume, high-performance batch and
real-time loads, as well as data validation.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


In an Oracle BI Applications environment, ODI works in
conjunction with Oracle BI Applications Configuration
Manager, which provides:
A user interface for managing load plans
Access to ODI Console, a web application that enables you
to view objects in the ODI repository, and control and monitor
ETL processes

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 10


Oracle GoldenGate
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle GoldenGate is a data replication tool that you can use to


create a replicated OLTP schema or schemas, facilitate
change-data capture, and aid in ETL and transactional system
performance.
Provides an OLTP mirrored schema on the OBAW
database instance using replication

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


This replicated source-dependent schema (SDS) is then
used as a source during ETL.
Provides less network input/output (I/O) during ETL
because the source data for extract is in the same physical
instance/machine as the OBAW target tables
Shortens the length of time that ETL takes by minimizing
the impact to the OLTP database

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications can optionally leverage Oracle GoldenGate. Oracle GoldenGate is not
covered in detail in this course. For more information, refer to Administering Oracle
GoldenGate and Source Dependent Schemas in the Oracle Fusion Middleware
Administrators Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 11


Oracle BI Applications Architecture Layers
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications architecture is comprised of three layers:


Client tier: User connections
Web and App tier: Oracle BI Domain
Database tier: Databases and repositories

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The graphic in the slide illustrates how all of the Oracle BI Applications architecture
components work together. Oracle BI Applications use all of the components depicted in the
graphic to deliver information specific to your business needs. Your data, from human
resources to sales totals, is extracted from your transactional application database, or source
system. This data is loaded into the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse database and it is
transformed using the mappings that are stored in the Oracle BI Applications Repository
database. This database system contains the repository information for Oracle BI Applications
ODI repository and the Oracle BI Applications components repository.
Each layer is discussed in more detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 12


Oracle BI Applications Architecture:
Database Tier
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The database tier contains:


Transactional application database
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse database
Oracle BI Applications repository database

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The transactional application database contains transactional application schemas and can
optionally be hooked up to the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse with Oracle
GoldenGate. The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse database contains the optional BI
Applications source-dependent data store (SDS) schema and the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse schema. The Oracle BI Applications Repository Database system includes the
Oracle BI Applications Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) repository and the Oracle BI Applications
components repository.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 13


Oracle BI Applications Architecture:
Oracle BI Domain
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ETL components:
ODI Console and ODI Agent
Configuration Manager
Functional Setup Manager
Load plan generator

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle BI EE components:
Presentation Services, BI Server, presentation catalog,
repository (.rpd) file

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Oracle Business Intelligence system logical architecture comprises a single integrated
set of manageable components called the Oracle BI domain. This layer includes the ODI
Console and ODI Agent, Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager, Functional Setup
Manager, and the load plan generator, all of which are hosted on the Oracle WebLogic
Server.
ODI Console is a web application that enables you to view objects in the ODI Repository and
control and monitor ETL processes.
ODI Agent is a Java EE agent, which handles schedules and orchestrates ETL sessions.
Load plan generator (not shown here) is a set of jar files used to create load plans in the ODI
repository. A load plan is an executable object that comprises and organizes the child objects
(referred to as steps) that carry out the ETL process.
Oracle BI Presentation Services is part of the Oracle BI EE platform. It provides processing to
visualize information for end-user consumption, such as analyses and dashboards. It uses a
presentation catalog to store saved content. The BI Applications presentation catalog is
prebuilt with role-based interactive dashboards and analyses to support the deployed Oracle
BI Applications product offerings.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 14


Oracle BI Server is the core server behind Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition. It
is an optimized query engine that receives analytical requests, intelligently accesses multiple
physical data sources, generates SQL to query data in the data sources, and then structures
the results to satisfy the requests.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Oracle BI Applications repository (.rpd) file is a prebuilt Oracle BI repository containing all
the metadata required for the deployed applications. It contains a logical business model
mapped to physical data sources, key performance indicators and metrics definitions, and a
presentation layer that exposes the business model to business users. Oracle BI Server
receives its processing information from this repository.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 15


Oracle BI Applications Architecture:
User Connections
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The top layer includes the user connections to Oracle BI


Applications:
BI Applications clients for business user roles
BI Applications clients for BI Applications ETL
administration roles and functional setup roles
BI Applications clients for BI Applications development

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


roles

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications users are assigned to application roles, which define a set of
permissions granted to a user or group. Application roles are discussed in more detail in
Lesson 13, Security.
Users assigned to business user application roles have access to web applications that allow
them to access the prebuilt Oracle BI Applications dashboards and analyses, and to build
new dashboards and analyses when the proper privileges are granted.
Users assigned to Oracle BI Applications ETL administration and functional setup application
roles have access to Configuration Manager and Functional Setup Manager, which are web
applications that allow administrative users to perform configuration tasks.
Users assigned to Oracle BI Applications development application roles have access to ODI
Console, which is a web application that provides the ability to view objects in the ODI
repository and to control and monitor ETL processes.
Users with development application roles can also access ODI Studio, which is used for
administering the ODI infrastructure, reverse engineering the metadata, developing projects,
scheduling, operating and monitoring executions, and customization.
Users with development application roles may also use the BI Administration Tool, which is a
Windows user interface for building, managing, and customizing the Oracle BI EE repository.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 16


Oracle BI Applications Product Life Cycle
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A typical Oracle BI Applications product lifecycle consists of the


following processes, some of which may happen concurrently:
Installing prerequisites and Oracle BI Applications
Configuring Oracle BI Applications
Performing a full load
Testing and moving to production

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Running periodic ETL
Patching Oracle BI Applications
Administering Oracle BI Applications

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Each of these topics is covered in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 17


Installing Prerequisites and
Oracle BI Applications
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Follow the instructions in the Oracle Fusion Middleware


Installation Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
to:
Complete all prerequisite steps before installing Oracle BI
Applications
Install and configure Oracle Business Intelligence

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Enterprise Edition platform
Install and configure Oracle Data Integrator
Install and configure Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications
Install required plug-ins and patches

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You learn more about the installation process in Lesson 5, Installing Oracle Business
Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 18


Configuring Oracle BI Applications
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After installation, use Configuration Manager and


Functional Setup Manager to perform functional
configuration for each of the Oracle BI applications that
you want to deploy.
Configuration tasks include:
Enabling offerings and functional areas

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Creating an implementation project
Setting up functional configuration data
Assigning tasks to developers

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The slide provides a partial list of configuration tasks that you can perform using the Oracle BI
Applications Configuration Manager and Functional Setup Manager web applications.
Functional configuration is covered in more detail in Lesson 7, Functional Configuration for
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications and Lesson 8, Administering and Maintaining
Functional Configuration Data.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 19


Performing a Full Load
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After you have configured your load plan and your functional
configuration data, you perform a full load of your transactional
data into the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating, generating, executing, and monitoring load plans is covered in more detail in
Lesson 9, Managing Load Plans.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 20


Testing and Moving to Production
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Test your Oracle BI Applications deployment in a


preproduction environment .
Continue to customize the deployment based on user
feedback and any encountered issues.
After your developers, users, and administrators have
verified that your test deployment meets your

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


organizations needs, you can move the deployment to
production.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 21


Running Periodic ETL
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications processes data by using two ETL


modes:
Full ETL load: Initially, a full load is performed to extract all
the required data and load all tables in the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse.
Incremental ETL load: Subsequently, the data warehouse is

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


updated incrementally and loads only data that has changed
since the most recent ETL was processed.
Once your Oracle BI Applications deployment is in
production, run periodic incremental ETL loads to update
data in your Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The ETL process is covered in more detail in Lesson 6, Understanding the ETL Process.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 22


Patching Oracle BI Applications
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Periodically Oracle provides patches for Oracle BI Applications


and related products.
Patching involves copying a small collection of files over
an existing installation.
A patch is normally associated with a particular version of
an Oracle product and involves:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Updating from one minor version of the same product to a
newer minor version of the same product
Applying an interim patch to resolve a specific issue
An Oracle BI Applications patch can include bug fixes,
metadata, and binary file updates.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 23


Administering Oracle BI Applications
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Ongoing administration of Oracle BI Applications includes:


Functional configuration
Managing and monitoring ETL processing
Customization
Security

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Each of these topics is covered in more detail in the remaining lessons for this course.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 24


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not an accurate description of the


Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse?
a. A universal data warehouse design that enables you to
integrate data from different source systems
b. A business intelligence platform that is used to access and
present data in easy-to-understand formats, such as tables

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


and graphs
c. Multiple instance support that enables you to use one data
warehouse deployment for multiple source system
instances
d. Conformed dimensions that enable you to view the data
from different subject areas

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 25


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Oracle BI Applications Oracle Data Integrator (ODI)


Repository contains load plan definitions, BI Applications
product hierarchy, setup objects, such as parameters and
domain mappings, and a list of functional tasks
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b
The Oracle BI Applications Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) Repository contains the BI
Applications-specific prebuilt ETL logic.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 26


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following are tasks that you perform using Oracle
BI Applications Configuration Manager?
a. Configure offerings, which are the products you have
purchased.
b. Configure functional areas, which are the component parts
of the offering.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Build, deploy, and manage complex data warehouses.
d. Monitor and manage load plans that you use to perform
ETL processes.
e. Used to access and present data in easy-to-understand
formats, such as tables and graphs.
f. Migrate configuration data across environments, using the
import and export options.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, d, f

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 27


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements does not describe Oracle


Data Integrator?
a. Comprehensive, unified ETL tool for building, deploying,
and managing complex data warehouses
b. Performs high-volume, high-performance batch and real-
time loads, as well as data validation

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. A data replication tool used to create a replicated OLTP
schema or schemas, facilitate change data capture, and
aid in ETL and transactional system performance
d. Works in conjunction with Oracle BI Applications
Configuration Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 28


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to identify and


describe the Oracle Business Intelligence (BI) Applications
architecture and its key components.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 29


Practice
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

3-1: Matching Oracle BI Applications Architecture Components

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 3 - 30


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Warehouse Content
Oracle Business Analytics

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to identify and


describe the content of Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 2


Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW) is a


prebuilt data warehouse data model that was designed using
dimensional modeling techniques to support the analysis
requirements of Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
(OBIA). It includes:
A universal data warehouse design that enables you to

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


integrate data from different source systems
Multiple instance support that enables you to use one data
warehouse deployment for multiple source-system
instances
Conformed dimensions that enable you to view the data
from different subject areas

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse is a modular enterprise-wide data warehouse data
model with conformed dimensions for data integrated from multiple sources. Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse provides code standardization, stores transaction data in the most
granular fashion, and tracks historical changes. It also supports multiple currencies and
languages.
The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse is supported only on the Oracle database.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 3


Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse Content
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse is comprised of the


following content:
Prebuilt star schemas
Supporting tables used for staging and processing

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Because complex queries run slowly on transactional databases, the database requirements
for OBAW are different from those of transactional applications. In OBAW, you modify data
much less frequently than in transactional systems, but you need quick results when viewing
dashboards, analyses, and while drilling down to detailed charts and graphs. Star schemas
are optimized for these uses.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 4


Star Schema
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A star schema is:


Called a star schema because the diagram of a star
schema resembles a star
Characterized by one or more fact tables and
corresponding dimension tables
Populated by extract, transform, and load (ETL) processes

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


In a format that provides highly optimized performance for
typical data warehouse queries

Product

Time Sales Market

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The star schema is the simplest data warehouse schema. It is called a star schema because
the diagram of a star schema resembles a star, with points radiating from a center. The center
of the star consists of one or more fact tables and the points of the star are the dimension
tables. A star schema is characterized by one or more very large fact tables that contain the
primary information in the data warehouse and a number of much smaller dimension tables
(or lookup tables), each of which contains information about the entries for a particular
attribute in the fact table.
A typical fact table contains keys and measures. For example, a simple fact table might
contain the measure Sales, and keys Time, Product, and Market. In this case, there would be
corresponding dimension tables for Time, Product, and Market. The Product dimension table,
for example, would typically contain information about each product number that appears in
the fact table. A measure is typically a numeric or character column, and can be taken from
one column in one table or derived from two columns in one table or two columns in more
than one table.
A star join is a primary-key to foreign-key join of the dimension tables to a fact table. The main
advantages of star schemas are that they provide a direct and intuitive mapping between the
business entities being analyzed by end users and the schema design, and provide highly
optimized performance for typical data warehouse queries.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 5


Star Schema Example: General Ledger Revenue
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

W_GL_REVN_F stores all the revenue transaction amounts in


document and local currency, and maintains three global
currency exchange rates.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In this example, W_GL_REVN_F is the fact table in the data warehouse star schema.
Examples of dimension tables are W_PRODUCT_D, W_USER_D, and so on.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 6


Selected Star Schemas of the OBAW
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Sales Call Center Conforming Dimensions


Opportunities ACD Events Customer
Quotes Rep Activities Products
Suppliers
Pipeline Contact-Rep Snapshot Cost Centers
Order Management Targets and Benchmark Profit Centers
Sales Order Lines IVR Navigation History Internal Organizations
Sales Schedule Lines Service Customer Locations
Customer Contacts
Bookings Service Requests GL Accounts
Pick Lines Activities Employee
Billings Agreements Sales Reps
Backlogs Workforce Service Reps
Partners
Marketing Compensation Campaign

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Campaigns Employee Profile Offers
Responses Employee Events
Marketing Costs Pharma
Supply Chain Prescriptions
Purchase Order Lines Syndicated Market Data
Purchase Requisition Lines Financials
Purchase Order Receipts Financial Assets
Inventory Balance Insurance Claims
Inventory Transactions Public Sector
Finance Benefits
Receivables Cases
Payables Incidents
General Ledger Leads
COGS

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications offers a breadth of analysis, spanning sales, service, and marketing to
back-office functions, and includes several verticalized areas. To meet the analytical
requirements, the OBAW contains a number of horizontal as well as vertical star schemas.
For example, in the pharmaceutical industry, specific star schemas are included to store
information about prescriptions and industry-syndicated market data. The star schemas can
be deployed in the OBAW depending on the applications that are selected, and the use of
conforming dimensions allows consistent analysis across different subject areas, applications,
and areas of analysis. Conforming dimensions are discussed in detail later in the lesson.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 7


OBAW Naming Conventions
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse tables use a three-part


naming convention: PREFIX_NAME_SUFFIX
Part Meaning Table Type

PREFIX BI Analytics-specific data W_ = Warehouse


warehouse application tables

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


NAME Unique table name All tables.

SUFFIX Table type _A = Aggregate


_D = Dimension
_MD = Mini Dimension
_DH = Dimension Hierarchy
_DS = Staging for Dimension
_H = Helper
_F = Fact
_FS = Staging for Fact
_G, _GS = Internal

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The table in the slide shows naming convention examples for some of the table types in
OBAW. Not all table types are listed here. For more information, refer to Naming
Conventions for Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse Tables in the Oracle Fusion
Middleware Administrators Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications.
Using W_GL_REVN_F as an example, W_ is the prefix indicating that it is a warehouse table,
GL_REVN is the table name, and _F is the suffix indicating that it is a fact table.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 8


OBAW Table Types
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Fact
Dimension
Minidimension
Helper
Hierarchy

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Staging
Aggregate
Internal
Conforming dimension

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide lists a subset of the table types used in the OBAW. Each table type listed here is
discussed in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 9


Fact Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Are central tables in star schemas


Typically contain numeric measurements
Examples: revenue, units
Can be aggregated
Store the most finely-detailed transactional data

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


This allows drilling to transactional details during analysis.
Are surrounded by dimension tables
Each dimension table is related to the fact table by a single
join.
Are identified with the suffix _F in the OBAW

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In a star schema, the central table is a fact table. Fact tables contain the metrics being
analyzed by dimensions. A fact table usually contains numeric measurements and has
multiple joins to dimension tables surrounding it. A fact table typically has two types of
columns: those that contain numeric facts (often called measures) and those that are foreign
keys to dimension tables. Dimension tables are related to the fact table by a single join. A fact
table contains either detail-level facts or facts that have been aggregated. Fact tables that
contain aggregated facts are often called summary tables. A fact table usually contains facts
with the same level of aggregation.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 10


Dimension Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Store descriptions of the characteristics of a business


Examples: date, account, product
Contain fewer records with many columns
Are identified with the suffix _D
Have columns that represent attributes of the dimension

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Have a single primary key joined to the fact table
A unique numeric key (ROW_WID) for each dimension table is
generated during the load process.
The key is used to:
Join each dimension table with its corresponding fact tables
Join the dimension with any associated hierarchy or extension
table

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The dimension tables in a star schema store descriptions of the characteristics of a business.
A dimension is descriptive information that qualifies a fact. For example, each record in a
product dimension represents a specific product. Typically, dimension tables are wide and
short because they contain fewer records with many columns. The columns of a dimension
table are also called attributes of the dimension. Each dimension table in a star schema has a
single primary key joined to the fact table.
The unique numeric key (ROW_WID) for each dimension table is generated during the load
process. This key is used to join each dimension table with its corresponding fact table or
tables. It is also used to join the dimension with any associated hierarchy table or extension
table. The ROW_WID columns in the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse tables are
numeric. In every dimension table, the ROW_WID value of zero is reserved for Unspecified. If
one or more dimensions for a given record in a fact table are unspecified, the corresponding
key fields in that record are set to zero.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 11


Minidimension Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Include the most queried attributes of parent dimensions


Are used to increase query performance
Are identified with the suffix _MD
Prebuilt minidimension tables include:
Responses

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Agreements
Assets
Opportunities
Orders
Quotes
Service Requests

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Minidimension tables, which contain subsets of heavily queried attributes of parent


dimensions, accrue benefits by segregating these attributes in their own tables. They improve
query performance, because the database does not need to join the fact tables to the big
parent dimensions but can join these small tables to the fact tables instead.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 12


Helper Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Are used by the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse to


solve complex problems that cannot be resolved by simple
dimensional schemas
Support a many-to-many relationship between fact and
dimension records

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Helper tables are used by the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse to solve complex
problems that cannot be resolved by simple dimensional schemas. In a typical dimensional
schema, fact records join to dimension records with a many-to-one relationship. To support a
many-to-many relationship between fact and dimension records, a helper table is inserted
between the fact and dimension tables. The helper table can have multiple records for each
fact and dimension key combination. This allows queries to retrieve facts for any given
dimension value. It should be noted that any aggregation of fact records over a set of
dimension values might contain overlaps (due to a many-to-many relationship) and can result
in double counting.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 13


Hierarchy Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Flatten tree hierarchies and maintain transactional


hierarchies in denormalized dimension tables
Enable users to drill through the hierarchy in reports

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Internal organization hierarchy table
(W_INT_ORG_DH)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Hierarchies stored in transactional systems are flattened in hierarchy tables in the data
warehouse. For example, W_ORG_DH stores the hierarchy relationships for the organization
dimension, W_PRODUCT_DH stores hierarchy relationships for the product dimension, and so
on. Hierarchy tables are rebuilt with each ETL run. Examples of hierarchy tables in the data
warehouse include:
Industry (W_INDUSTRY_DH)
Organization (W_ORG_DH)
Internal Organization (W_INT_ORG_DH)
Employee Positions (W_POSITION_DH)
Product (W_PRODUCT_DH)
The screenshot shows a partial view of W_INT_ORG_DH, which stores the flattened hierarchy
of internal organizations. When one organization rolls up into multiple hierarchies, the multiple
hierarchies are stored in this table. Each hierarchy is differentiated by a hierarchy number and
name.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 14


Staging Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Are intermediate storage tables within the OBAW


Hold data for transformation before loading the data into
the dimension and fact tables
Data can be loaded from both Oracle and non-Oracle
transactional databases.
Are normally populated only with incremental data

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Are not persistent
Truncated before each load
Are loaded by source-dependent extract (SDE) ETL
processes
Are sources for source-independent load (SIL) ETL
processes that load and transform staging table data,
internal and external, into the dimension and fact tables

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Staging tables are used primarily to stage incremental data from the transactional database.
When the ETL process runs, staging tables are truncated before they are populated with
change capture data. During the initial full ETL load, these staging tables hold the entire
source data set for a defined period of history, but they hold only a much smaller volume
during subsequent refresh ETL runs. The staging table structure is independent of source
data structures and resembles the structure of data warehouse tables. This resemblance
allows staging tables to also be used as interface tables between the transactional database
sources and data warehouse target tables.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 15


Aggregate Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Summarize detail-level facts at a higher level


Can dramatically improve query performance
Are identified with the suffix _A
Examples:
Daily to yearly sales
Sum the fact data by date or sales region

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Base Fact Table Aggregate Table


DayTime_ID Month_ID
Store_ID
Region_ID
Customer_ID
Sale_$
Sale_$
5 million rows 100,000 rows

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

One of the main uses of a data warehouse is to sum fact data with respect to a given
dimension (for example, by date or by sales region). Performing this summation on demand is
resource-intensive and slows down response time. The Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse precalculates some of these sums and stores the information in aggregate tables
to speed up response time. In the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse, the aggregate
tables have been suffixed with _A.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 16


Internal Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Assist in the load process and contain warehouse


metadata
Examples:
A new row is entered into the W_ETL_RUN_S table with a
new process ID for every load.
W_EXCH_RATE_G stores exchange rates.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Internal tables in the OBAW are those tables that cannot be classified as staging, fact,
dimension, hierarchy, extension, or dimensional map tables. These tables store important
information that is used during the ETL process, are rebuilt during each ETL process, and are
not used by end-user query tools. Internal tables include the following:
W_COSTLST_G: The cost list information used by the ETL process. It is mirrored in the
Siebel transactional database by S_ETL_COSTLST.
W_DUAL_G: The table used by the ETL process to generate calculated values. It is
similar to S_DUAL in the Siebel transactional database.
W_EXCH_RATE_G: The exchange rate information used by the ETL process. It is
mirrored in the transactional database by S_ETL_EXCH_RATE.
W_DIM_TABLES_G: A list of data warehouse tables that are map-enabled
W_LOV_EXCPT_G: An intermediate table for finding exceptions in a list of values
W_LST_OF_VAL_G: A list of values used in the ETL process

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 17


Conforming Dimension Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Are common dimension tables shared by fact tables


Enable cross-fact analysis
Are used by the OBAW to ensure a consistent view across
the OBAW
Enable enterprise-wide business analysis

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Conforming
Dimension Fact
Dimension

Conforming
Fact Dimension
Dimension

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Conforming dimension tables are shared by multiple fact tables allowing consistent analysis
across multiple star schemas.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 18


Standard Column Suffixes in OBAW
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse uses suffixes to


indicate columns that must contain specific values.

Suffix Description In Table Types

_CODE Code field _D, _DS, _FS, _G, _GS

Date field

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


_DT D, _DS, _FS, _G, _DHL, _DHLS

_ID Staging table identifier that maps to _FS, _DS


the _WID column of the
corresponding _F table
_FLG Indicator or flag _D, _DHL, _DS, _FS, _F, _G

_WID Identifier generated by OBAW _F, _A, _DHL


linking dimension and fact tables,
except for ROW_WID

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The table in the slide shows examples of column suffixes in OBAW. Not all column suffixes
are listed here. For more information, refer to Standard Column Suffixes in Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse in the Oracle Fusion Middleware Administrators Guide for Oracle
Business Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 19


System Columns in Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

OBAW tables contain system columns that are populated


automatically and should not be modified by the user.
System Column Description

ROW_WID Surrogate key to identify a record uniquely

DATASOURCE_NUM_ID Unique identifier of the source system from which data

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


was extracted. It is recommended that you define
separate unique source IDs for each of your different
source instances.
ETL_PROC_WID Unique identifier for the specific ETL process used to
create or update this data
INTEGRATION_ID Unique identifier of a dimension or fact entity in its
source system
X_CUSTOM Column used as a generic field for customer extensions

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The table in the slide shows examples of system columns in OBAW. Not all system columns
are listed here. For more information, refer to System Columns in Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse Tables in the Oracle Fusion Middleware Administrators Guide for Oracle
Business Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 20


Multi-Language Support
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications provides multi-language support for both


Oracle BI EE metadata objects and data, which enables users
to see dashboards, analyses, and data translated into their
preferred language.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 21


OBAW Currency Preferences
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Currency Description

Contract currency The currency used to define the contract amount. This
currency is used only in Project Analytics
CRM currency The CRM corporate currency as defined in the Fusion
CRM application. This currency is used only in CRM
Analytics applications.
Document currency The currency in which the transaction was done and the

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


related document created
Global currency The OBAW stores up to three group currencies. These
need to be preconfigured so as to allow global reporting
by the different currencies. Stored in W_EXCH_RATE_G.
Local currency The accounting currency of the legal entity in which the
transaction occurred
Project currency The currency in which the project is managed. This may
be different from the functional currency. This applies
only to Project Analytics.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The OBAW supports the currency preferences listed in the table.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 22


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the correct statement about star schemas.


a. Star schemas are designed to support transactional
processing.
b. Star schemas are composed of a fact table, a set of
dimension tables, and the joins that relate the dimension
tables to the fact.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Star schemas are optimized to support frequent updates.
d. Oracle BI Applications star schemas are all deployed to an
OBAW regardless of the applicability of the schemas to the
desired analysis.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 23


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not included in Oracle Business


Intelligence Applications?
a. A universal data warehouse design that enables you to
integrate data from different source systems
b. Prebuilt star schemas characterized by one or more
dimension tables and corresponding aggregate tables

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Multiple instance support that enables you to use one data
warehouse deployment for multiple source-system
instances
d. Conformed dimensions that enable you to view the data
from different subject areas

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 24


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Conforming dimension tables are intermediate storage tables


within the OBAW.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b
Conforming dimension tables are shared by multiple fact tables, allowing consistent analysis
across multiple star schemas.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 25


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the incorrect description of staging tables.


a. Intermediate storage tables within the OBAW
b. Hold data for transformation before loading the data into
the dimension and fact tables
c. Are usually populated only with incremental data
d. Are loaded by source-independent load (SIL) ETL

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


processes

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 26


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the correct description of a dimension table.


a. Contain more records than a fact table with fewer columns
b. Are identified with the suffix _DIM
c. Have multiple joins to the fact table
d. Store descriptions of the characteristics of a business

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 27


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the incorrect descriptions of a fact table.


a. Central table in a star schema
b. Typically contain numeric measurements
c. Cannot be aggregated
d. Are surrounded by staging tables

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 28


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to identify and


describe the content of Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 29


Practice
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

4-1: Matching Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse


Components

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 4 - 30


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Intelligence Applications
Installing Oracle Business

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to install and


configure Oracle Business Intelligence Applications (OBIA) and
related components.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 2


Review Preinstallation and
Installation Requirements
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you install and deploy Oracle Business Intelligence


Applications:
Review supported platforms, system requirements, and
certification information documented in the System
Requirements and Supported Platforms guide on Oracle
Technology Network (OTN).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Review the most current version of the Oracle BI
Applications Release Notes available on OTN.
Read the Oracle Fusion Middleware Installation Guide for
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications for
preinstallation, hardware, and deployment requirements.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 3


Preinstallation and Deployment Requirements
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Guidelines for setting up the Oracle Business Analytics


Warehouse (OBAW) database
Using a separate database for the OBAW
Using Oracle template files

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide lists the preinstallation and deployment requirements for Oracle BI Applications.
Each requirement is discussed in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 4


Guidelines for Setting Up the OBAW
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Allocate around 50 to 70 percent of the total available


server memory to the database.
At a minimum, separate the data and index tablespaces.
Use 8k block size for Oracle warehouses.
If you are using multiple disk storage systems, stripe the
tablespace containers and files across as many disks as

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


possible.
Raw devices for tablespaces provide better performance
as compared to cooked file systems.
RAID-5 is known to give a good balance of performance
and availability.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 5


Using a Separate Database for the OBAW
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ETL is configured to maximize hardware resources.


Analytical queries interfere with normal use of the
transactional database.
The data in a transactional database is normalized for
update efficiency.
Historical data cannot be purged from a transactional

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


database.
Transactional databases are tuned for one specific
application.
The OBAW database can be specifically tuned for the
analytical queries and extract, transform, and load (ETL)
processing.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Although it is technically possible to put the OBAW in the same database as the transactional
database, it is not recommended for performance reasons. The transactional database is
structured as an online transaction processing (OLTP) database, whereas the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse is structured as an online analytical processing (OLAP)
database, each optimized for its own purpose. The slide lists the reasons for not combining
the two databases. More detail is provided here:
ETL is configured to maximize hardware resources; and, therefore, the warehouse
should not share any resources with any other projects.
The analytical queries interfere with normal use of the transactional database, which is
entering and managing individual transactions.
The data in a transactional database is normalized for update efficiency. Transactional
queries join several normalized tables and will be slow (as opposed to pre-joined, de-
normalized analytical tables).
Historical data cannot be purged from a transactional database, even if not required for
current transaction processing, because you need it for analysis. (By contrast, the
analytical database is the warehouse for historical as well as current data.) This causes
the transactional database to further slow down.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 6


Transactional databases are tuned for one specific application, and it is not productive
to use these separate transactional databases for analytical queries that usually span
more than one functional application.
The analytical database can be specifically tuned for the analytical queries and extract,
transform, and load (ETL) processing. These are quite different from transactional
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

database requirements.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 7


Using Oracle Template Files
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

To configure the OBAW on Oracle databases more easily, refer


to the parameter template file init11gR2_template.ora or
init11gR2_Exadata_ template.ora, which is stored in
\<BI_Oracle_Home>\biapps\etl.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The parameter template file provides parameter guidelines based on the cost-based optimizer
for Oracle 11g R2. Use these guidelines as a starting point. You will need to make changes
based on your specific database sizes, data shape, server size (CPU and memory), and type
of storage.
Copy the appropriate template file into your <ORACLE_HOME>/dbs directory. Then review the
recommendations in the template file, and make the changes based on your specific
database configuration. The database administrator should make changes to the settings
based on performance monitoring and tuning considerations.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 8


OBIA Installation Tasks
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Create database schemas using the Fusion Middleware


Repository Creation Utility (RCU).
2. Install Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition 11g.
3. Install Oracle Data Integrator (ODI).
4. Create schemas by using the
Business Analytics Applications Suite RCU.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


5. Install Oracle BI Applications by using the Business
Analytics Applications Suite Installer.
6. Apply Fusion Middleware platform patches.
7. Configure Oracle BI Applications.
8. Upgrade to WebLogic Server 10.3.6.
9. Configure user access for ODI Studio.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide and the next list the high-level installation task for Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications. Each task is discussed in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 9


OBIA Installation Tasks
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

10. Apply the ATGLite patch.


11. Apply patch 16629917 to ODI Studio.
12. Copy source files.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 10


1. Create Database Schemas Using the Fusion
Middleware Repository Creation Utility.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Fusion Middleware Repository Creation Utility (RCU)


to create the Metadata Services (MDS) and Business
Intelligence Platform (BIPLATFORM) schemas in your
database.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Before you install Oracle Business Intelligence Applications, you must install the Oracle
Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition infrastructure, and before you install the Oracle
Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition infrastructure, you must use the Fusion Middleware
Repository Creation Utility (RCU) to create the Metadata Services (MDS) and Business
Intelligence Platform (BIPLATFORM) schemas in your database.
The Repository Creation Utility (RCU) is a graphical tool for creating and managing Oracle
Fusion Middleware database schemas in your database.
The screenshot shows the Summary page when creating the MDS and BIPLATFORM
schemas using the Fusion Middleware RCU in a Windows environment.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 11


2. Install Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise
Edition 11g.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you install Oracle Business Intelligence Applications,


you must install Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition
11g deployed on WebLogic Server 10.3.6.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you run the Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (Oracle BI EE) 11g
installer, you can select either the Software Only Install or Enterprise Install option.
If you select the Software Only Install option, then you must install WebLogic Server 10.3.6
before running the Oracle BI EE installer.
If you select the Enterprise Install option, WebLogic Server 10.3.5 is automatically installed.
You must then upgrade to WebLogic Server 10.3.6 after the Oracle BI Applications installation
is complete.
The screenshot shows the Complete page for an Oracle BI EE installation using the
Enterprise Install option in a Windows environment. The remaining slides in this lesson are
based on an Oracle BI EE installation using the Enterprise Install option in a Windows
environment.
Before performing installation steps, please refer to Notice for Install of Oracle BI
Applications OBIA 11.1.1.7.1 (Doc ID 1558419.1) on My Oracle Support for additional
information about installing Oracle Business Intelligence Applications version 11.1.1.7.1 with
WebLogic 10.3.6 and Oracle BI EE in Software Only Install mode.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 12


3. Install Oracle Data Integrator.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications requires an installation of Oracle Data


Integrator (ODI) 11g.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Installation Completed page for Oracle Data Integrator (ODI)
installed in a Windows environment. The ODI installer must be run on the same machine
where the Oracle BI EE installer was run. You cannot use an ODI installation outside of BI
Domain for use with Oracle BI Applications.
When you install ODI, specify a directory inside the Oracle Middleware Home. You cannot
install in just any Oracle Middleware Home directory. You must install ODI to the same Oracle
Middleware Home directory where Oracle BI EE has been installed. In the screenshot this
directory is D:\Oracle\Middleware. Oracle Home Location is the root directory where the
ODI products are installed. In the screenshot this is
D:\Oracle\Middleware\Oracle_ODI1.
The WebLogic Server option (not shown here) is selected by default if the installer detects a
Middleware Home with Oracle WebLogic Server installed. This will always be the case with
the ODI install for Oracle BI Applications, because you must install ODI to the same Oracle
Middleware Home directory where Oracle BI EE has been installed. Oracle BI EE for Oracle
BI Applications is supported only on Oracle WebLogic Server.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 13


4. Create Schemas by Using the
Business Analytics Applications Suite RCU.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Run the Business Analytics Applications Suite RCU to create


schemas for Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse, Oracle
Business Intelligence Applications Components Repository,
and ODI Master and Work Repositories.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Summary page for the Business Analytics Applications Suite RCU
installed in a Windows environment. You need to run the Business Analytics Applications
Suite RCU to create schemas for the following components:
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications Components Repository
ODI Master and Work Repository
Before you run the Business Analytics Applications Suite RCU in a Windows environment,
make sure that you unzip the downloaded RCU zip file into a directory that does not have
spaces in the directory path.
The RCU uses .dmp files to create the required schemas. You must copy the .dmp files for
each schema to a directory with global write access on the appropriate database server
machines. RCU writes log files to this directory.
The .dmp files are located in BIA_RCU_HOME/rcu/integration/biapps/schema.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 14


5. Install Oracle BI Applications by Using the
Business Analytics Applications Suite Installer.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You must run the Business Analytics Applications Suite installer


on the machine where you ran the Oracle BI EE installer.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Complete page for an Oracle BI Applications installation in a
Windows environment. All files are installed to disk in the Oracle Home for BI directory. During
installation, you must specify the path to the directory for an existing Oracle Middleware Home
where Oracle BI EE has been installed. The Oracle Home directory you specify must be the
Oracle Home for Oracle BI EE. You cannot choose another Oracle Home or create a new
one.
Note that you will perform post-installation steps to configure Oracle BI Applications in a later
procedure.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 15


6. Apply Fusion Middleware Platform Patches.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Fusion Middleware Platform patches are available for download


as part of the Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
11.1.1.7.1 media pack.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows a completed patching report run in a Windows environment. You can
download Oracle Fusion Middleware Platform Patches for Oracle Business Analytics
Applications Suite from the Oracle Business Intelligence Applications 11.1.1.7.1 media pack
on Oracle Software Delivery Cloud. Download the following three parts from the Oracle
Business Intelligence Applications 11.1.1.7.1 Media Pack:
Oracle Fusion Middleware Platform Patches for Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications (Part 1 of 2)
Oracle Fusion Middleware Platform Patches for Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications (Part 2 of 2)
Oracle Fusion Middleware Platform Patches for Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications for <OS>
Extract the contents of the three downloaded zip files containing the patches into the same
directory. The patches are contained in folders: biappsshiphome, odi, soa, weblogic, and
oracle_common. You do not have to unzip the individual patches within the folders.
You run a script to apply the patches. The script is a Perl script and is available in
<BI_Oracle_Home>/biapps/tools/bin/APPLY_PATCHES.pl.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 16


7. Configure Oracle BI Applications.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Run the configApps.bat file to extend the BI Domain to


deploy Oracle BI Applications and to configure the components.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Complete page for Oracle BI Applications configuration in a
Windows environment. During this phase, the following key configurations occur:
Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager, Functional Setup Manager, ODI Java EE
Agent, ODI Console, and Load Plan Generator are deployed into WebLogic Server.
Component wiring is performed.
A BI Applications Administrator User (with full access to Configuration Manager and
access to ODI with the Supervisor role) is created in WebLogic Server embedded
LDAP.
The ODI repository for BI Applications is configured and set to use external
authentication (authentication against the WebLogic Server embedded LDAP).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 17


8. Upgrade to WebLogic Server 10.3.6.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When you install Oracle BI EE in Enterprise Install mode,


WebLogic Server 10.3.5 is automatically installed.
You then must upgrade to WebLogic Server 10.3.6.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You use the WebLogic Upgrade Installer to upgrade to WebLogic Server 10.3.6. You can
download WebLogic Upgrade Installer from My Oracle Support. The screenshot shows the
directory confirmation page to upgrade WebLogic Server to 10.3.6 in a Windows environment.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 18


9. Configure User Access for ODI Studio.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

To configure user access for ODI Studio:


1. Copy cwallet.sso and jps-config-jse.xml from:
<MW_Home>/user_projects/domains/
bifoundation_domain/odi-client-
config/embedded
to:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


<ODI_Home>/oracledi/client/odi/bin
2. Edit
<ODI_Home>/oracledi/client/odi/bin/odi.conf
by updating the JPS configuration file name as follows:
AddVMOption -
Doracle.security.jps.config=./jps-config-
jse.xml

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

ODI Studio is a desktop client that enables you to design and manage the ODI repository.
ODI Studio is installed during the ODI installation if you select ODI Studio as an option during
installation. Typically, ODI Studio will not be installed to the BI Domain, but instead will be
installed on developer machines. The supported operating systems for ODI Studio are
Windows 32-bit and 64-bit and Linux 32-bit.
The ODI Repository is configured for external authentication against WebLogic Server's
embedded LDAP server. ODI Studio must be configured to use the appropriate security files
for authentication. You must perform the steps on the slide for all installations of ODI Studio.
Note: You must perform these steps even if ODI Studio has been installed on the machine
where Oracle Home for BI resides. If you do not successfully complete these steps, you will
receive the following error message when attempting to sign in to ODI Studio: ODI-10188:
Error while login from OPSS../jps-config.xml (No such file or directory).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 19


10. Apply the ATGLite Patch.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ATGLite is a J2EE component used by Oracle BI


Applications Configuration Manager and Functional Setup
Manager.
The ATGLite patch updates tables and seed data in the BI
Applications Components Repository schema (BIACOMP).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Connect to the BIACOMP schema.

Execute the patch script.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The binaries for ATGLite Patch 16239380 are applied when the Fusion Middleware platform
patches are applied. However, the schema update and seed data updates are not applied and
must be performed by running the patch script.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 20


11. Apply Patch 16629917 to ODI Studio.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In a command window, navigate to


D:\PATCH_TOP\16629917 and run opatch apply.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Verify that the patch is successfully applied.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Patch 16629917 is available in PATCH_ROOT_DIR\odi\generic. Unzip


p16629917_111170_Generic.zip to a PATCH_TOP directory (in this example:
D:\PATCH_TOP\16629917). Follow the instructions in the patch README file to apply the
patch to ODI Studio.
System administrators must provide this patch to developers who have installed ODI Studio
on their machines.
Before you run the patch, shut down all servers (Admin Server and all Managed Servers).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 21


12. Copy Source Files.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Copy source files installed in to a location outside of


BI_Oracle_Home/biapps/etl directory BI_Oracle_Home that ODI can access.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

During installation of Oracle BI Applications, source files are installed in the


BI_Oracle_Home/biapps/etl directory. These files are used during the ETL process and
will be configured by functional developers.
You must copy these files to a location that ODI can access but that is outside of the Oracle
Home for BI directory; otherwise, when the Oracle BI Applications environment is upgraded or
patched, these files will be overwritten.
In the example in the slide, copy all directories and files under the
D:\oracle\Middleware\Oracle_BI1\biapps\etl directory into a location that ODI
can access but is outside of the Oracle Home for BI directory. In this example, the files are
copied to D:\etl. Avoid copying the files to a location with a long directory path.
Please note: Depending on your deployment, there may be files in the
BI_Oracle_Home/biapps/etl directory that you will not use.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 22


Post-Installation System Setup Tasks
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Connect to the BI Applications ODI repository.


2. Set the Business Analytics Warehouse connection in ODI.
3. Register the source system in Configuration Manager.
4. Register the source system in ODI.
5. Enable offerings for deployment.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


6. Edit preferred currency display names.
7. Set languages for data load.
8. Run the domain-only load plan.
9. Grant user access to Configuration Manager, Functional
Setup Manager (FSM), and ODI.
10. Trim the OBIA repository.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide lists the post-installation system setup tasks. Each task is covered in detail in the
slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 23


1. Connect to the BI Applications ODI Repository.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Start ODI Studio and select Provide connection information BI Apps Project is
Connect to Repository. for the OBIA work repository. visible in ODI Studio.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you start ODI Studio for the first time after installation, you are prompted to connect to
the OBIA ODI Work Repository. You can enter any login name, but the credentials must be for
the administrative user that you defined during installation. After you click OK to initialize the
ODI connection, the BI Apps Project mapping folders are visible in ODI Studio.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 24


2. Set the Business Analytics Warehouse
Connection in ODI.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Topology tab
in ODI Studio

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Specify the new path
Double-click for ETL source files.
BIAPPS_DW_FILE <path>.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You use the Topology tab in ODI Studio to set the connection properties in the ODI repository
of the physical schema associated with the BIAPPS_DW_FILE physical server. In the
navigation pane, select the Topology tab.
In the left pane, expand Technologies > File > BIAPPS_DW_FILE and then double-click
BIAPPS_DW_FILE <path> to edit the BIAPPS_DW_FILE physical schema in the right pane.
BIAPPS_DW_FILE <path> points to the original location of the source files. Recall that during
the installation process these files are copied to a location that ODI can access, but that is
outside of the Oracle BI Home directory. This is done to prevent these files from being
overwritten when an Oracle BI Applications environment is upgraded or patched.
In the Definition pane, for the Directory (Schema) and Directory (Work Schema) properties,
specify the directory where you copied the source files and include the subfolders. In this
example, the location is D:\etl\data_files\src_files\BIA_11.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 25


3. Register the Source System in
Configuration Manager.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Register Source in Configuration Manager page in


Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager to register the
source system.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select the Define Business Intelligence
Applications Instance link.

Specify the source properties.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager to register the source system. Launch
Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager and sign in as the BI Applications
Administrator.
In the navigation pane, select System Setups > Define Business Intelligence Applications
Instance. The Source Systems tab is displayed (not shown here). Click the Add icon to
display the Register Source dialog box.
To register the source in Configuration Manager, use the Register Source in Configuration
Manager page to specify the following properties:
Product Line
Product Line Version
Source Instance Name
Description
Data Source Number
Click Next to open the Register Source in Oracle Data Integrator Topology page, which is
discussed in the next slide.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 26


4. Register the Source System in ODI.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Register Source in Oracle Data Integrator Topology


page to register the source in ODI.
On the Technology: Oracle tab, provide connection details for the model.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


On the Technology: File System tab, provide connection details for the source files.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the Technology: Oracle tab, specify the following properties:


ODI Data Server Name
JDBC Driver
JDBC URL
Database Username
Database Password
In the Technology: File System tab, specify the following properties:
ODI Data Server Name
Host Name
Path To File
This information is passed to ODI where the connections are created. The connection details
are not propagated to the ODI repository until you have entered and saved the information on
both the Register Source in Configuration Manager page and the Register Source in Oracle
Data Integrator Topology page.
Please note that ODI Data Server Names must be unique across both Oracle and File System
technologies.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 27


5. Enable Offerings for Deployment.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use Configuration Manager to enable the OBIA offerings that


you have purchased and are deploying.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

From the Tasks bar, under System Setups, click Manage Business Intelligence Applications
to display the Manage Business Intelligence Applications dialog box. Select the Business
Intelligence Application Offerings tab.
Select the Enabled check box next to the desired offering(s). In this example, Oracle Financial
Analytics and its associated functional areas are selected. Enabling an offering makes the
setup data associated with that offering available in Configuration Manager.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 28


6. Edit Preferred Currency Display Names.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Manage Preferred Currencies dialog box in


Configuration Manager to edit the default currency display
names.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Business Intelligence is installed with a set of preferred currencies with preconfigured
preferred currency names and preferred currency codes. Preferred currency names are used
in Oracle Business Intelligence dashboards in the Currency drop-down in the My Account
dialog box and on the Preferences tab for a user logged into Oracle Business Intelligence.
You can use the Manage Preferred Currencies dialog box in Configuration Manager to edit
the default currency display names. You edit preferred currency name values to change the
currency labels that are displayed in all modules associated with BI dashboards. For example,
you might want to change the Local Currency label from Ledger Currency to Local
Currency.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 29


7. Set Languages for Data Load.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications supports data loads in multiple


languages.
Specify the languages for data loads in Oracle BI
Applications Configuration Manager.
American English is the default installed language; all
other languages are disabled.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 30


8. Run the Domain-Only Load Plan.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Define, generate, and run a domain-only load plan to load


source-specific data into OBIA Configuration Manager tables.
This enables Configuration Manager to display the
appropriate source-specific values as choices in drop-
down lists for setup objects.
Before you perform this step, you must have registered the

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


source system and propagated connection details to ODI
as discussed earlier in this lesson.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The steps for running a domain-only load plan are covered in detail in Lesson 9, Managing
Load Plans.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 31


9. Grant User Access to Configuration Manager,
FSM, and ODI.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Work with your security administrator to grant users


access to Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager,
Functional Setup Manager, and ODI.
Grant the appropriate application (duty) roles to a user
based on the users job responsibilities.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Upon installation, the Oracle BI Applications system is configured to use WebLogic Server
embedded LDAP for authentication. Access to Configuration Manager and Functional Setup
Manager is controlled through the following application (duty) roles.
BI Applications Administrator Duty
BI Applications Functional Developer Duty
BI Applications Implementation Manager Duty
Load Plan Operator Duty
Load Plan Administrator Duty
During Oracle BI Applications installation, an Oracle BI Applications Administrator user is
created. This user has full access to Configuration Manager and ODI. This user can perform
all Oracle BI Applications functions, which includes performing system setups in Configuration
Manager, performing functional configurations in Functional Setup Manager, and running and
monitoring ETL. Additional users can be created and assigned appropriate roles based on the
tasks these users will perform.
Security implementation and administration is discussed in detail in Lesson 13, Security.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 32


10. Trim the OBIA Repository.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can trim the OBIA repository (RPD) so that it includes only
the projects that are relevant to your deployment.
OBIA release 11.1.1.7.1 delivers a full RPD file, deployed
to the BI Server, with projects for all the OBIA modules.
Although optional, trimming the RPD makes the BI Server
startup process faster and also makes patching quicker.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The steps for trimming the RPD depend on the status of your deployment, as follows:
If the RPD has not been customized for your deployment: Extract the projects for the
products that your organization has purchased. You do not need to perform a merge.
If the RPD has been customized for your deployment: Extract the applicable projects
from the full (delivered) RPD for release 11.1.1.7.1, and, additionally, merge that RPD
with your customized release 11.1.1.7.1 RPD.
For more detailed information, refer to the Trimming the RPD section in the Oracle Fusion
Middleware Installation Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 33


Next Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After the system setups are complete, your environment is


ready for functional configuration and, subsequently, data
loads.
In the remaining lessons for this course, you should learn
how to:
Perform functional configuration

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Perform ETL processing
Administer and customize OBIA
Implement security for OBIA

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 34


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which are valid reasons to not install the OBAW in the same
database as the transactional database:
a. ETL is configured to maximize hardware resources.
b. Analytical queries interfere with normal use of the
transactional database.
c. The data in a transactional database is normalized for

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


update efficiency.
d. Historical data cannot be purged from a transactional
database.
e. Transactional databases are tuned for one specific
application.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, c, d, e

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 35


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you install Oracle Business Intelligence Applications,


you must install the Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise
Edition infrastructure.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 36


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You use the Fusion Middleware Repository Creation Utility


(RCU) to:
a. Create the Metadata Services (MDS) schema.
b. Create the ODI Master Repository
c. Deploy WebLogic 10.3.6
d. Create the Business Intelligence Platform (BIPLATFORM)

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


schema.
e. Create the ODI Work Repository

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 37


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which key configurations occur when you run the


configApps.bat file to extend the BI Domain to deploy
Oracle BI Applications and to configure the components?
a. Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager is deployed
into WebLogic Server.
b. ODI Console and Load Plan Generator are deployed into

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


ODI Studio.
c. Component wiring is performed.
d. A BI Applications Administrator user is created in the
WebLogic Server embedded LDAP.
e. The ODI repository for BI Applications is configured and
set to use authentication against the WebLogic Server
embedded application role.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 38


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not a post-installation configuration


task for OBIA?
a. Connect to the BI Applications ODI repository.
b. Set the Business Analytics Warehouse connection in ODI.
c. Register the source system in Configuration Manager.
d. Register the target system in ODI.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


e. Enable offerings for deployment.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 39


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to install and


configure Oracle Business Intelligence Applications (OBIA) and
related components.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 40


Demonstrations
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

D-1: Creating Database Schemas by Using the Fusion


Middleware Repository Creation Utility
D-2: Installing Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise
Edition 11g
D-3: Installing Oracle Data Integrator
D-4: Creating Schemas by Using the Business Analytics

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Applications Suite RCU
D-5: Installing Oracle BI Applications by Using the
Business Analytics Applications Suite Installer
D-6: Applying Fusion Middleware Platform Patches

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications is pre-installed in this training environment. Double-click the


BIApps_Install_Demos shortcut on the desktop to view demonstrations of the steps that were
used to install OBIA in this training environment.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 41


Demonstrations
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

D-7: Configuring Oracle BI Applications


D-8: Upgrading to WebLogic Server 10.3.6
D-9: Applying the ATGLite Patch
D-10: Applying Patch 16629917 to ODI Studio
D-11: Copying Source Files

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 42


Practice
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

5-1: Performing Post-Installation System Set Up Tasks

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications is pre-installed in this training environment. In this practice, you


perform post-installation system set up tasks to complete integration of the Oracle BI
Applications components and to ready the system for functional configurations and data
loads.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 5 - 43


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Understanding the ETL Process

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to identify and


explain the following:
Fundamental extract, transform, and load (ETL) concepts
and processes related to Oracle Business Intelligence (BI)
Applications
Components used in the Oracle BI Applications ETL

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


process
Prebuilt metadata used in the Oracle BI Applications ETL
process

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 2


ETL Phases
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

An Oracle BI Applications ETL process includes the following


phases:
Source-dependent extract (SDE) tasks: Extract data
from the source system and stage it in staging tables
SDE tasks are source specific.
Source-independent load (SIL) tasks: Transform and

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


port data from staging tables to base fact or dimension
tables
SIL tasks are source independent.
Post load process (PLP) tasks: Are executed only after
the dimension and fact tables are populated
A typical use of a PLP task is to transform data from a base
fact table and load it into an aggregate table.
PLP tasks are source independent.
Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 3


Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A load plan is an executable object that comprises and


organizes the child objects (referred to as steps) that carry out
the ETL process.
You define a load plan in Oracle BI Applications
Configuration Manager by selecting a data source and one
or more fact groups.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


After you define the load plan, you generate it to build it in
the Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) repository.
You then execute the load plan in Oracle BI Applications
Configuration Manager to perform the ETL process.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuration Manager is a web application that you use to manage and monitor load plans,
which execute ETL processes. It acts as a console for Oracle Data Integrator, which is the
embedded data integration platform and ETL processing engine. Configuration Manager
provides:
A user interface for managing load plans
Access to ODI Console, which is a web application that enables you to manage and
monitor ETL processes

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 4


Oracle Data Integrator Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Data Integrator repository is the central component of


the ODI architecture.
Stores configuration information about the IT infrastructure,
metadata of all applications, projects, scenarios, and the
execution logs
Acts as a version control system where objects are

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


archived and assigned a version number
Is composed of one master repository and several work
repositories

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Many instances of the ODI repository can coexist in the IT infrastructure (for example,
development, quality assurance, user acceptance, and production). The architecture of the
repository is designed to allow several separated environments that exchange metadata and
scenarios (for example, development, test, maintenance, and production environments).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 5


Master Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

There is usually only one ODI master repository that stores the
following information:
Security information including users, profiles, and rights for
the ODI platform
Topology information including technologies, server
definitions, schemas, contexts, languages, and so on

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Versioned and archived objects

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 6


Work Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

An ODI work repository stores information about:


Models, including schema definition, datastores structures
and metadata, fields and columns definitions, data quality
constraints, cross-references, data lineage, and so on
Projects, including business rules, packages, procedures,
folders, knowledge modules, variables, and so on

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Scenario execution, including scenarios, scheduling
information, and logs

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The work repository contains actual developed objects. Several work repositories may coexist
in the same ODI installation (for example, to have separate environments or to match a
particular versioning life cycle). When the work repository contains only the execution
information (typically for production purposes), it is then called an execution repository.
Oracle BI Applications is shipped with a prebuilt ODI work repository.
The objects referenced in this slide are covered in more detail later in this lesson.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 7


ODI Run-Time Agent
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The ODI Run-Time Agent is a Java EE agent, which handles


schedules and orchestrates ETL sessions.
1. At design time, developers generate scenarios from the
business rules that they have designed.
2. The code of these scenarios is then retrieved from the
repository by the Run-Time Agent.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


3. This agent then connects to the data servers and
orchestrates code execution on these servers.
4. It retrieves the return codes and messages for the
execution, as well as logging information.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

There are two types of ODI Run-Time Agent:


Java EE Agent: Can be deployed as a web application and benefit from the features of
an application server
Standalone Agent: Runs in a simple Java Virtual Machine and can be deployed where
needed to perform the integration flows
Both these agents are multi-threaded Java programs that support load balancing and can be
distributed across the information system.
The ODI Run-Time Agent holds its own execution schedule which can be defined in Oracle
Data Integrator, and can also be called from an external scheduler. ODI Run-Time Agent can
also be invoked from a Java API or a web service interface.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 8


ODI Console
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ODI Console is a web application deployed in Oracle WebLogic


application server.
Provides read access to the ODI repository and the ability
to perform topology configuration and production
operations
Can be accessed via Oracle BI Applications Configuration

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 9


ETL Processing: Overview
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The ODI Run-Time Agent orchestrates ETL sessions.

Configuration Manager
Source ODI Console

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


ODI Agent ODI
Repository

Target

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The graphic in the slide summarizes the interaction of the components presented in the
preceding slides.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 10


ODI Studio
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ODI Studio is a Fusion Client Platform (FCP)based user


interface that is used for:
Administering the infrastructure (security and topology)
Reverse-engineering the metadata
Developing project
Scheduling, operating, and monitoring executions

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Administrators, developers, and operators use ODI Studio
to access ODI repositories.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 11


ODI Studio Navigators
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

ODI Studio provides four navigators for managing the different


aspects and steps of an ODI integration project:
Designer Navigator: To design data integrity checks and
build transformations
Operator Navigator: To manage and monitor production
Topology Navigator: To manage the data describing the

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


information systems physical and logical architecture
Security Navigator: To manage the security information
in ODI

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 12


Prebuilt Oracle BI Applications ETL Logic
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications is shipped with a prebuilt ODI work


repository that contains Oracle BI Applicationsspecific prebuilt
ETL logic.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 13


Prebuilt Oracle BI Applications ETL Objects
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Project
Adaptor
Interface
Package
Scenario

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Variable
Knowledge module
Model
Datastore
Load plans and scenarios

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The slide lists the prebuilt ODI metadata objects that are used in ETL processing for Oracle BI
Applications. Each of these objects is discussed in detail in the slides that follow.
The objective here is to explore some of the prebuilt metadata in ODI Studio to gain a
high-level understanding of some of the key elements, components, and naming conventions
related to ETL processing.
At this point, do not concern yourself with specific details about the metadata, the ODI Studio
tools, or Configuration Manager, which are all covered in more detail in subsequent lessons.
Rather, focus on the metadata objects and their general use in the ETL process.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 14


Project
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A project is a collection of components, including organizational


objects (such as folders) and development objects (such as
interfaces or variables).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Prebuilt project

Organizational folders and subfolders

Development objects

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Components involved in a project include components contained in the project and global
components referenced by the project. In addition, a project also uses the components
defined in the models and topology.
The slide shows the BI Apps Project, which is a prebuilt ODI project that ships with Oracle BI
Applications. The BI Apps Project folder contains various subfolders and objects used to
manage the ETL process for Oracle BI Applications.
Folders are components that help organize the work in a project. Subfolders can be inserted
into folders.
The example in the slide shows the project expanded to Components > DW > Oracle >
Generate DW DDL. This folder contains the procedures used to generate and optionally
execute DDL scripts to synchronize the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse schema with
the Oracle BI Applications model in ODI. You learn how to generate DDL scripts in the lesson
titled Building a Category 1 Customization.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 15


Adaptor
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Mappings folder in BI Apps Project contains prebuilt


adaptor folders for various Oracle source systems from
which data is extracted.
Adaptor folders contain prebuilt task folders.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Prebuilt adaptor

Task folder

Development objects

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Expand BI Apps Project > Mappings to view the subfolders for the prebuilt adaptors for
various Oracle source systems from which data is extracted.
For example, SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor is a subfolder that contains the prebuilt SDE task
folders for the 11.5.10 version of Oracle E-Business Suite. SDE_PSFT_90_Adaptor contains
the prebuilt SDE task folders for the 9.0 version of PeopleSoft, and so on.
The screenshot shows SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor expanded to the
SDE_ORA_APAgingBucketsDimension task folder. Notice that the task folders comprise
packages, interfaces, and procedures.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 16


Interface
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

An interface consists of a set of rules that define the loading of


a datastore or a temporary target structure from one or more
source datastores.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example in the slide, notice there are two interfaces for the
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations task folder.
The slide also shows the mapping diagram in the ODI Designer editor for the
W_GEO_DS_SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS interface. This is a temporary interface, which is used to
extract data for the staging table W_GEO_DS. In this interface, data is extracted from
columns in the HZ_LOCATIONS dimension datastore in the source system and mapped to
columns in a temporary target named SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS, where the data is transformed
for some mappings.
The second interface, W_GEO_DS, is the main interface. It loads the data into the
W_GEO_DS staging table in the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse. This interface uses
the SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS temporary target in the W_GEO_DS_SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS
interface as its source, and the W_GEO_DS dimension staging table as its target.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 17


Package
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A package is the largest unit of execution in Oracle Data


Integrator.
A package is a workflow, made up of a sequence of steps
organized into an execution diagram.
Packages assemble and reference other components from
a project such as interfaces, procedure, or variable.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example in the slide, notice there are three steps for the SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact
package in the SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact task folder.
Refresh IS_INCREMENTAL: This is a variable step, which declares, sets, refreshes, or
evaluates the value of a variable. In this case, this is a refresh variable step, which
refreshes the variable by running the query specified in the variable definition. More
specifically, this variable is used to determine whether this package should be run in full
or incremental mode.
Refresh LAST_EXTRACT_DATE: This is also a refresh variable step that determines
the date on which data was last extracted for this package. This variable is used to
determine if this package should execute a full or incremental load.
Run SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact.W_GL_REVN_FS: This is a flow step, which
executes an interface. In this example, it executes the W_GL_REVN_FS interface,
which loads the W_GL_REVN_FS fact staging table in the data warehouse.
You can also view and administer package steps in an execution diagram in the ODI
Designer editor.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 18


Scenario
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A scenario is designed to put a source component


(interface, package, procedure, or variable) into
production.
For example, a package scenario can be called by a step
in a load plan.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When a component is finished and tested, you can generate the scenario corresponding to its
actual state. Generating a scenario for an object compiles the code for this object for
deployment and execution in a production environment. This operation can be completed in
ODI Studio Designer. The scenario code (the language generated) is frozen, and all
subsequent modifications of the components, which contributed to creating it, will not change
it in any way.
It is possible to generate scenarios for packages, procedures, interfaces, or variables.
Scenarios generated for procedures, interfaces, or variables are single-step scenarios that
execute the procedure or interface, or refresh the variable. After the scenario is generated, it
is stored in the work repository.
Scenarios appear in a development environment under the source component in the Projects
tree of Designer Navigator, and appearfor development and production environmentsin
the Scenarios tree of Operator Navigator.
The screenshot in the slide shows a prebuilt scenario generated for the
SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact package with the naming convention FOLDER NAME_SCENARIO
NAME. You learn more about generating and using scenarios in the lesson titled Building a
Category 1 Customization.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 19


Variable
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A variable is an object that stores a single value, which can


be a string, a number, or a date.
The variable value is stored in Oracle Data Integrator.
A variable can be used in several places in your projects,
and its value can be updated at run time.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The BI Apps Projects > Variables folder contains the prebuilt variables for BI Apps Project. A
variable can be created as a global variable or in a project. This defines the variable scope.
Global variables can be used in all projects, whereas project variables can be used only
within the project in which they are defined.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 20


Knowledge Module
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Knowledge modules (KMs) are components of Oracle Data


Integrators open connector technology.
KMs contain the knowledge required by Oracle Data
Integrator to perform a specific set of tasks against a
specific technology or set of technologies.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Data Integrator uses six types of knowledge modules:


Reverse knowledge module (RKM): Used to perform a customized
reverse-engineering of data models for a specific technology. These KMs are used in
data models.
Loading knowledge module (LKM): Used to extract data from source systems (files,
middleware, database, and so on). These KMs are used in interfaces.
Check knowledge module (CKM): Used to check whether constraints on the sources
and targets are violated. These KMs are used in data models static check and
interfaces flow checks.
Integration knowledge module (IKM): Used to integrate (load) data to the target
tables. These KMs are used in interfaces.
Journalizing knowledge module (JKM): Used to create a journal of data modifications
(insert, update, and delete) of the source databases to keep track of the changes. These
KMs are used in data models and for changed data capture.
Service knowledge module (SKM): Used to generate the code required for creating
data services. These KMs are used in data models.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 21


Model
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A model:
Is the description of a set of datastores
Corresponds to a group of tabular data structures stored in
a data server

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A model is based on a logical schema defined in the ODI topology. In a given context, this
logical schema is mapped to a physical schema. The data schema of this physical schema
contains the physical data structure: tables, files, JMS messages, and elements from an XML
file that are represented as datastores. Models, as well as all their components, are based on
the relational paradigm (table, columns, keys, and so on). The models in Data Integrator
contain only metadata, that is, the description of the data structures. They do not contain a
copy of the actual data.
The screenshot in the slide shows the prebuilt model for the Oracle BI Applications data
warehouse. Notice that the model is organized into submodels that represent the various
components of the data warehouse: aggregate, dimension, dimension staging, and so on.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 22


Datastore
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Represents a data structure


Can be a table, a flat file, a message queue, or any other
data structure accessible by ODI
Describes data in a tabular structure
Is composed of columns

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot in the slide shows the prebuilt W_GEO_DS dimension staging datastore and its
associated columns. Recall that this is the target table of the interface presented earlier in this
lesson.
Because datastores are based on the relational paradigm, it is also possible to associate the
following elements to a datastore:
Keys: A key is a set of columns with a specific role in the relational paradigm. Primary
and alternate keys identify each record uniquely. Non-unique indexes enable optimized
record access.
References: A reference is a functional link between two datastores. It corresponds to a
foreign key in a relational model. For example, the INVOICE datastore references the
CUSTOMER datastore through the customer number.
Conditions and Filters: Conditions and filters are WHERE-type SQL expressions
attached to a datastore. They are used to validate or filter the data in the datastore.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 23


Load Plans and Scenarios
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Load Plans and Scenarios panel displays the prebuilt


Oracle BI Applications scenarios and generated load plans.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Recall that a scenario is designed to put a source component (interface, package, procedure,
or variable) into production. A load plan is the largest executable object in Oracle Data
Integrator. It uses scenarios in its steps. When an executable object is used in a load plan, it
is automatically converted into a scenario. For example, a package is used in the form of a
scenario in load plans.
The screenshots in the slide show the prebuilt scenario for the
SDE_ORA_GLREVENUEFACT package that was discussed earlier in this lesson.
The Load Plans and Scenarios panel also displays any load plans that have been generated
in ODI Studio or Configuration Manager. After a load plan is generated, you can update the
scenarios in the load plan. You learn more about generating load plans in the lesson titled
Managing Load Plans and more about updating load plan scenarios in the lesson titled
Building a Category 1 Customization.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 24


Full ETL and Incremental ETL
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Full ETL
Initially, a full load is performed to extract all the required
data and load all the tables in the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse.
Incremental ETL
Subsequently, the data warehouse is updated incrementally.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


It loads only the data that has changed since the most recent
ETL was processed.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Incremental ETL loads eliminate redundant loads of data. This is significant, because the load
process is time-consuming and resource-intensive.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 25


Change Capture
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

During a full load, Oracle BI Applications extracts:


All records from tables that are sources for dimension tables
Records that were created after an Initial Extract Date from
tables that are sources for fact tables
During an incremental load, Oracle BI Applications
extracts:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Records that have changed or were created after a "Last
Extract Date." This is done by comparing the Last Extract
Date value to a "Last Updated Date" (or LUD) type column in
the source table. If the source table does not have such a
column, Oracle BI Applications extracts all records from that
table.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Initial Extract Date defines a cut-off so that not all records are loaded into the data
warehouse. You set the Initial Extract Date value for each data source in Oracle BI
Applications Configuration Manager.
An ETL process can extract a record from a single table or from multiple tables. When a
record is the result of joining multiple tables, one of these tables is identified as the base
table, which defines the granularity of the record. When extracting fact records, Oracle BI
Applications compares the Created Date of the base table only with the Initial Extract Date.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 26


Prune Days
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The Prune Days parameter is used to:


Extend the window of the ETL extract beyond the last time
the ETL actually ran
Ensure that records that may have somehow been missed
in an earlier ETL process are picked up in the next ETL

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Last Extract Date is a value that is calculated based on the last time data was extracted from
that table less a Prune Days value. Records can be missed in an ETL process when a record
is being updated while the ETL process is running and was not committed until after the ETL
completed.
You set the Prune Days parameter value in Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager.
Setting a small value means the ETL will extract fewer records, thus improving performance;
however, this increases the chances that records are not detected. Setting a large number is
useful if ETL runs are infrequent, but this increases the number of records that are extracted
and updated in the data warehouse. Therefore, you should not set the Prune Days value to a
very large number. A large Prune Days number can also be used to trigger re-extracting
records that were previously processed but have not changed. The value for Prune Days
should never be set to 0.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 27


Multi-Source Environments
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications supports the loading of data into the


Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse from multiple
source systems as long as the source systems are
different.
Oracle BI Applications does not support multiple instances
of the same source system.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


For example, your environment could have a PeopleSoft 9.0
source and an Oracle EBS 11.5.0 source, but not two
instances of the Oracle EBS 11.5.10 source.
Multi-source ETL processes are different from
single-source ETL processes in that you could potentially
have both sources being used to load the same fact
groups and dimensions.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 28


ETL Application Roles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications has two application (duty) roles for


ETL operations:
Load Plan Operator
Load Plan Administrator
Oracle BI Applications has the following additional roles:
BI Applications Administrator

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


BI Applications Functional Developer
BI Applications Implementation Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Access to Configuration Manager and Functional Setup Manager is controlled through


application (duty) roles. The security administrator must grant the appropriate roles to a user
based on the users job responsibilities.
The BI Applications administrator, load plan operator, and load plan administrator users will
require appropriate access to ODI. In addition to these users being created in the LDAP
system, they must also be created in the ODI Repository, and they must be granted the
Supervisor profile or an appropriate ODI profile. The BI Applications administrator must be
granted the Supervisor role in ODI. Work with your security administrator to obtain the
appropriate duty roles.
Application roles and ODI security settings are covered in more detail in the lesson titled
Oracle BI Applications Security.
For more information about the Configuration Manager and Functional Setup Manager
screens that each duty role has access to, see Oracle Fusion Middleware Security Guide for
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications.
For more information about managing security in ODI, see Managing Security Settings in
Oracle Fusion Middleware Developer's Guide for Oracle Data Integrator.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 29


ETL Versus ELT
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Traditional ETL tools:


Extract data from various sources
Transform the data in a middle-tier ETL engine
Load the transformed data into the target
Extract, load, transform (ELT) tools move the data
transformation step:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Extract data from various sources
Load the tables into the destination server
Transform the data on the target

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Traditional ETL tools operate by first extracting the data from various sources, transforming
the data in a proprietary, middle-tier ETL engine that is used as the staging area, and then
loading the transformed data into the target data warehouse or integration server. Therefore,
the term ETL represents both the names and the order of the operations performed. The data
transformation step of the ETL process is by far the most compute-intensive, and is performed
entirely by the proprietary ETL engine on a dedicated server. The ETL engine performs data
transformations (and sometimes data quality checks) on a row-by-row basis, and therefore,
can easily become the bottleneck in the overall process. In addition, the data must be moved
over the network twiceonce between the sources and the ETL server, and again between
the ETL server and the target data warehouse. Moreover, if you want to ensure referential
integrity by comparing data flow references against values from the target data warehouse,
the referenced data must be downloaded from the target to the engine, thus further increasing
network traffic and download time, and leading to additional performance issues.
In response to the issues raised by ETL architectures, a new architecture has emerged, which
in many ways, incorporates the best aspects of manual coding and automated
code-generation approaches. Known as ELT, this new approach changes where and how
data transformation takes place, and leverages existing developer skills, RDBMS engines,
and server hardware to the greatest extent possible.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 30


In essence, ELT moves the data transformation step to the target RDBMS, changing the order
of operations to: extract the data from the source tables, load the tables into the destination
server, and then transform the data on the target RDBMS by using native SQL operators.
Note that with ELT, there is no need for a middle-tier engine or server as shown in the figure
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

in the slide.
Oracle Data Integrator supports both ETL and ELT data integration.
Note: For the sake of continuity, ETL is used throughout this course.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 31


ETL Process Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

SDE routines extract data from sources and load data into
OBAW staging tables.
SIL routines transform data and load data into OBAW fact
and dimension tables.

Source Dependent

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Extract Source 1

Source 1
Source Dependent Source
Full & OBAW
Extract Source 2
Source 2 refresh Independent OBAW
staging
extraction Loading
tables
Source Dependent
Source 3 Extract Source 3

Source Dependent
Extraction

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide provides a summary of how the SDE and SIL workflows are used during the ETL
process.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 32


ETL Process: Example
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The example in the slide illustrates the ETL architecture. Typically, the extract load transform
process has two main steps. The first step is the extract and stage load step, and the second
step is the load transform step. The extract and stage load step is generated from a
combination of the main interface and the nested temporary interface. The load transform step
is generated as a result of the integration knowledge module (IKM).
In this example, step 1 issues a SQL statement on the source that joins the GL_SET_OF_
BOOKS table with the HR_ORGANIZATION_INFORMATION table. The join is executed on
the source database, and the resulting data is staged. Then, a second join occurs at the load
transform stage between the W_DOMAIN_MAP_G table and the temporary stage table,
which results in the loading of the W_INV_ORG_ DS dimension staging table.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 33


Why Use ODI?
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Faster and simpler development and maintenance:


ODI employs a declarative rules-driven approach to data
integration:
Greatly reduces the learning curve of the product
Increases developer productivity
Facilitates ongoing maintenance
Data quality firewall

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


ODI ensures that faulty data is automatically detected and
recycled before insertion in the target application.
This is performed without the need for programming,
following the data integrity rules and constraints defined both
on the target application and in ODI.
Platform independent
ODI supports all platforms, hardware, and operating systems
with the same software.
Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Data Integrator employs a powerful declarative design approach to data integration,
which separates the declarative rules from the implementation details. ODI is also based on a
unique ELT (Extract - Load Transform) architecture, which eliminates the need for a
stand-alone ETL server and proprietary engine, and instead leverages the inherent power of
your RDBMS engines. This combination provides the greatest productivity for both
development and maintenance, and the highest performance for the execution of data
transformation and validation processes.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 34


Why Use ODI?
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Better execution performance


Traditional data integration software (ETL) is based on
proprietary engines that perform data transformations row by
row, thus limiting performance.
By implementing an ELT architecture, based on your existing
RDBMS engines and SQL, you are capable of executing

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


data transformations on the target server at a
set-based level, giving you much higher performance.
Simpler and more efficient architecture
The ELT architecture removes the need for an ETL Server
sitting between the sources and the target server.
It uses the source and target servers to perform complex
transformations, most of which happen in batch mode when
the server is not busy processing end-user queries.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 35


Why Use ODI?
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Data Connectivity
ODI supports all RDBMSs including all leading data
warehousing platforms (such as Oracle, Exadata, Teradata,
IBM DB2, Netezza, Sybase IQ, and so on) and numerous
other technologies (such as flat files, ERPs, LDAP, XML, and
so on).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Cost savings
The elimination of the ETL Server and ETL engine reduces
both the initial hardware and software acquisition and
maintenance costs.
The reduced learning curve and increased developer
productivity significantly reduce the overall labor costs of the
project, as well as the cost of ongoing enhancements.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 36


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

What type of information is stored in the ODI master


repository?
a. Security information including users, profiles, and rights for
the ODI platform
b. Topology information including technologies, server
definitions, schemas, contexts, and languages

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Scenario execution, including scenarios, scheduling
information, and logs
d. Versioned and archived objects

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 37


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

What type of information is stored in an ODI work repository?


a. Models, datastores structures and metadata, column
definitions, data quality constraints, cross references, and
data lineage
b. Post load process (PLP) tasks that are executed before
the dimension and fact tables are populated

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Projects, including business rules, packages, procedures,
folders, knowledge modules, and variables
d. Scenario execution, including scenarios, scheduling
information, and logs

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 38


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which ODI component orchestrates ETL sessions?


a. ODI Console
b. ODI Studio
c. ODI Configuration Manager
d. ODI Run-Time Agent

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


e. Designer Navigator

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 39


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following do not describe an ODI package?


a. Largest unit of execution in ODI
b. A workflow, made up of a sequence of steps organized
into an execution diagram
c. An executable object that comprises and organizes the
child objects that carry out the ETL process

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. A group of tabular data structures stored in a data server

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 40


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to identify and


explain the following:
Fundamental extract, transform, and load (ETL) concepts
and processes related to Oracle Business Intelligence (BI)
Applications
Components used in the Oracle BI Applications ETL

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


process
Prebuilt metadata used in the Oracle BI Applications ETL
process

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 41


Practice
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Exploring Prebuilt Oracle BI Applications Metadata in ODI

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 6 - 42


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Intelligence Applications

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Functional Configuration for Oracle Business

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to:


Use Configuration Manager to configure Oracle Business
Intelligence Applications
Use Functional Setup Manager to perform functional
configuration for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications
Describe when to use Configuration Manager versus when

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


to use Functional Setup Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 2


Functional Configuration Terminology
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Source instance
The transactional system that serves as the source of data
for the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW)
Offering
A BI Application product that you have purchased
For example, Oracle Financial Analytics, or Oracle Sales

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Analytics
Functional area
A component part of an OBIA offering; the smallest unit of an
OBIA offering that can be implemented
For example, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, and
General Ledger are functional areas in Oracle Financial
Analytics.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 3


Functional Configuration
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Functional setup of OBIA offerings must be performed to


ensure the accurate and successful movement of data from a
source database to the target OBAW.
These functional setups, based on either business
requirements or on transactional source system settings or
configurations, direct the manner in which relevant data is

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


moved and transformed from source database to target
database.
Additionally, some functional setups of OBIA control the
manner in which data is displayed.
Functional setups are also called functional configurations.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 4


Functional Configuration Tools
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Functional configuration for OBIA is done using the following


tools:
Configuration Manager
Functional Setup Manager (FSM)

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Each of these tools is discussed in detail in the slides that follow. Please note that you cannot
perform functional configuration using either tool until you have run a domain-only load plan.
You learn more about domain-only load plans in Lesson 9, "Managing Load Plans."

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 5


Configuration Manager
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

OBIA Configuration Manager is a web application for


setting up and maintaining an OBIA environment.
You use Configuration Manager to:
Launch FSM to configure offerings and functional areas
Monitor and manage setup data, and extend the OBAW
where necessary

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Monitor and manage load plans that you use to perform
extract, transform, and load (ETL) processes
Migrate configuration data across environments, using the
import and export options

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Configuration Manager contains the setup objects for OBIA. It provides administrative
graphical user interfaces for setup and configuration. It is the recommended product for
ongoing administration and maintenance of functional setup within OIBA. It also provides a
quick review of OBIA setup values, and is the recommended tool for monitoring and
troubleshooting load plan executions. Configuration Manager works in conjunction with
Functional Setup Manager to provide guided tasks to configure OBIA offerings and functional
areas.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 6


Configuration Manager Work Area
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Work panel
Tasks bar

To open FSM

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Collapse
Expand/Collapse

Resize

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the main Tasks bar for Configuration Manager and the functional
configuration work area for Manage Data Load Parameters.
The Configuration Manager work area includes:
Tasks bar, which provides links to Configuration Manager options
Work panel, which displays the currently selected option
Perform Functional Configurations option, for starting FSM
Collapse Tasks bar arrow. Use the Collapse Tasks bar arrow to hide the Tasks bar and
maximize the screen area for displaying the setup pages.
Resize bar for the Tasks bar
Expand/Collapse Contextual Pane arrow (for Data Load Parameters and Reporting
Parameters only). Please note: Some pages (for example, the Manage Data Load
Parameters page) have an additional Contextual pane on the right side that can be
expanded (and resized) or collapsed.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 7


Functional Setup Manager
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Functional Setup Manager is a web application that enables


you to manage and perform functional configuration tasks for
OBIA offerings. Functional Setup Manager:
Provides a guided set of sequenced tasks and
dependency management for task-based implementation
Is launched from Configuration Manager to perform

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


functional configurations
Invokes Configuration Manager user interface for setup
tasks
Is recommended for initial implementation

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

FSM is installed and deployed as part of OBIA. In FSM, you select the OBIA offering and
functional areas that you wish to deploy. FSM generates a list of configuration tasks specific
to the offering and functional areas that were selected. These tasks can be assigned to
different functional developers and the status of the OBIA implementation project can be
monitored in FSM. Setup user interfaces guide functional developers through the performance
of each task. The key point here is you should use the guidance presented in Functional
Setup Manager's list of tasks to perform your initial configurations.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 8


Functional Setup Manager Work Area
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Tasks bar Work panel

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Collapse

Resize

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 9


Performing Functional Configuration
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Enabling offerings and functional areas


Creating an implementation project
Performing functional tasks
Assigning tasks to developers
Managing offerings and functional areas

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide lists some of the important functional configuration tasks you perform using
Functional Setup Manager. Each task is discussed in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 10


Enabling Offerings and Functional Areas
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

At the start of a deployment project, you need to enable your


offerings and functional areas for implementation.

Select
Configure
Offerings. Enable offering.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Enable functional
areas.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the Tasks bar in Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager, select the Perform
Functional Configurations link to launch FSM. In FSM, in the Tasks bar, under
Implementations, select the Configure Offerings link to display the Configure Offerings page.
In the example in the slide, you select the Enable for Implementation check box next to
Oracle Financial Analytics. You then expand Oracle Financial Analytics, select the Enable for
Implementation check box next to Oracle E-Business Suite-Oracle Financial Analytics, and
then select the Enable for Implementation check boxes for all the desired functional areas
under Oracle E-Business Suite-Oracle Financial Analytics.
If you do not enable an offering for implementation, you will not be able to configure that
offering using FSM.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 11


Creating an Implementation Project
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use FSM to create implementation projects to configure


offerings and the modules that you want to deploy.
Implementation project
Select Manage
Implementation
Projects.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Associated tasks

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The steps to create an implementation project are not displayed in the slide. To create an
implementation project, in the Tasks bar, select Implementations > Manage Implementation
Projects to display the Manage Implementation Projects page. Then choose Actions > Create
to enter a name for the project and select the offering to implement. To make offerings easier
to manage, Oracle recommends that you deploy one offering per project. In other words, if
you are deploying three offerings, then create three implementation projects.
In this example, you have installed Oracle Financial Analytics and you create an
implementation project to configure the ETL for Oracle Financial Analytics. To configure ETL
for Oracle Financial Analytics, you must create at least one implementation project. When you
create an implementation project, you select the offering to deploy as part of that project.
Once you create an implementation project, FSM generates the tasks required to configure
the specified offering. By default, the tasks are assigned to the BI Administrator user. If
required, you can optionally assign tasks to functional developers, who will then perform the
tasks. Use the Go to Task column to complete functional configuration tasks.
The example in the slide shows an implementation project named IP_Financial_Analytics,
configured for the Oracle Financial Analytics offering, with its associated tasks.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 12


Performing Functional Tasks
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When you click Go to Task, you display a configuration page


that enables you complete the task.

Click Go to Task

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


to display a page to complete the task.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example in the slide, select the Configure Initial Extract Date task, and then click the
Go to Task icon to display the Task: Configure Initial Extract Date configuration page, which
enables you to complete the task.
When you click Go to Task for an informational task, you display a list of steps that you must
perform externally to FSM. For example, you might need to use Oracle BI EE Administration
Tool to configure a value in the BI metadata repository.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 13


Changing Task Status
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Status icon for a task to edit its status.

Click the Status icon

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


to edit the status of a task.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you have completed the steps listed in the informational task, you must manually set
the status of the task. You can edit the status by clicking the Status icon for the task, or
selecting the task and clicking the Edit Status button on the toolbar (not shown here).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 14


Assigning Tasks
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Select task(s) and click Assign Tasks.

3. Search for and select users.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


2. Click to add users.

4. User is assigned to task.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

By default, tasks are assigned to the BI Applications Administrator user (weblogic, in this
example). You can assign tasks to functional developers so that functional developers can
configure OBIA offerings. When functional developers log in and display the Assigned
Implementation Tasks tab, they would only see the tasks that have been assigned to them.
When BI Administrators log in and display the Implementation Projects tab, they see all tasks.
In a small deployment project, a single person with BI Applications Administrator privileges
might perform all of the setup and functional configuration tasks for Oracle BI Applications.
Notice that you could also add notes and assign a due date for a task.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 15


Managing Offerings and Functional Areas
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Search for objects.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Drill on objects to see details.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the Tasks bar select Implementation Objects > Manage Offerings and Functional Areas.
From here, you can manage the various offerings and their associated functional areas. For
example, you can drill on an offering to view detail information about the offering and the
associated functional areas. You can also search by name, offerings, functional area, or
product.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 16


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements best describes a functional


area?
a. An OBIA offering
b. An OBIA product that you have purchased
c. The transactional system that serves as the source of data
for the OBAW

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. The smallest unit of an OBIA offering that can be
implemented

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 17


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements describing functional


configuration are correct?
a. Functional configuration of OBIA offerings must be
performed to ensure the accurate and successful
movement of data from a source database to the target
OBAW.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


b. Functional configuration directs the manner in which
relevant data is moved and transformed from source
database to target database.
c. Some functional configuration of OBIA controls the manner
in which data is displayed.
d. Functional setups are also called functional configurations.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 18


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements about Configuration Manager


is incorrect?
a. It is a web application for setting up and maintaining an
OBIA environment.
b. It is used to launch Functional Setup Manager to configure
offerings and functional areas.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. It extends OLTP transactional sources where necessary.
d. It is used to monitor and manage load plans that you use
to perform extract, transform, and load (ETL) processes.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 19


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements about Functional Setup


Manager is incorrect?
a. It provides a guided set of sequenced tasks and
dependency management for task-based implementation.
b. It is launched from Configuration Manager to perform
functional configurations.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. It invokes the Configuration Manager user interface for
setup tasks.
d. It is not recommended for initial implementation.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 20


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to:


Use Configuration Manager to configure Oracle Business
Intelligence Applications
Use Functional Setup Manager to perform functional
configuration for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 21


Practice
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

7-1: Performing Functional Configuration for Oracle BI


Application Offerings

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 7 - 22


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Configuration Data

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Administering and Maintaining Functional

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objective
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to use Oracle


BI Applications Configuration Manager and Functional Setup
Manager (FSM) to administer and maintain functional
configuration data for Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 2


Overview
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

During an Oracle BI Applications (OBIA) deployment project,


you use Configuration Manager and Functional Setup Manager
(FSM) to manage and make changes to configuration values
for:
Domains and mappings
Data load parameters

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Reporting parameters

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 3


Domains and Domain Mappings
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Domains are pre-seeded dimensional values that help define


business metrics.

Set search criteria.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Source domains Target domains

Domain mappings

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Domains are typically located in the source system. For example, in Financial Analytics,
domains store information about the General Ledger accounts. If domains are not available in
a source system, then they can be sourced from a flat file.
The screenshot shows the Domain Mappings tab. You access this tab by selecting Tasks >
Domains Administration > Manage Domain Mappings and Hierarchies in Configuration
Manager.
This tab shows how data fields in the source system map to data fields in the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse (OBAW). The domain mappings specify how data in a source system is
extracted and loaded into the OBAW.
For example, the data in the source domain Account Employee Size (ACCNT_EMP_SIZE)
extracts and loads into the target domain Customer Employee Size Category
(W_ACCNT_EMPLOYEE_SIZE).
Notice that you can search for domain mappings by source instance, offering, fact group,
dimension group, domain name, and so on.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 4


Domain Member Mappings
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Domain member mappings specify how domain member data


in a source system is extracted and loaded into domain
member data in the OBAW.

Select domain
mapping

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


to view
domain member
mappings.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

There are two types of domain member mappings:


Regular domains have members consisting of a single value. These single values map
to single member values in the target system.
Band domains have members consisting of two values (Range Start and Range End)
that specify a range.
In the screenshot, Account Employee Size is an example of a band domain. Each range
maps to a single target domain member. In this example, the range 1 to 5000 maps to
Employee Total Between 0 and 5000, the range 5,001 to 10,000 maps to Employee Total
Between 5001 and 10000, and so on.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 5


Source Domains
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Data fields in a source system application are referred to as


source domains.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Source domain
values are read-only.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Manage Source Domains page. To navigate to this page, select
Tasks > Domains Administration > Manage Source Domains in Configuration Manager.
Source domains displayed on the Source Domains tab are read-only.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 6


Source Domains: Domain Members
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select a source domain to display domain members in the


lower pane.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

On the Source Domains page, you can select a source domain to view its members in the
lower pane. In the example in the slide, you select the Source AP Transaction Source domain
to view its domain members. Domain members are the permitted values for a source domain.
Notice that you do not have the ability to edit and add domain members in this pane. To
maintain data integrity in Oracle Business Intelligence Applications, some domains have been
designed as non-extensible, and are, therefore, read-only.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 7


Warehouse Domains
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Data fields in the OBAW are referred to as warehouse


domains.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Manage Warehouse Domains page. To navigate to this page,
select Tasks > Domains Administration > Manage Warehouse Domains in Configuration
Manager.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 8


Warehouse Domains: Warehouse Members
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select a warehouse domain to display warehouse members in


the lower pane.

Click to add warehouse


domain members.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select warehouse domain

to view or edit warehouse members.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example in the slide, you select the Country warehouse domain to view its warehouse
members. Warehouse members are the permitted values for a warehouse domain.
Notice that, unlike when working with source domain members, you have the ability to edit
and add warehouse members in this pane.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 9


Warehouse Domain Hierarchies
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Warehouse domain hierarchies are domains that have been


organized into hierarchies to enable the data to be more
effectively analyzed.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Domain hierarchies are displayed in inverted format. In the example in the slide,
W_COUNTRY is the parent of child W_REGION.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 10


Warehouse Domain Hierarchies:
Domain Member Mappings
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select a domain mapping in the hierarchy to display domain


member mappings in the lower pane.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select domain mapping

to view domain member mappings.

Display all, mapped, or unmapped.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Select a domain mapping in the hierarchy to display domain member mappings in the lower
pane.
Use the field next to Source Domain Members to display mapped, unmapped, or all source
domain members.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 11


Editing Domain Member Mappings
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select domain mapping.

Click Edit.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Edit domain member mapping.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Business Intelligence Applications ships with default domain value mappings that map
the seeded BI Application domain values to the seeded configuration data. If you want to use
these default categories, you do not need to make any changes to these mappings before you
start your ETL processes. The example in the slide shows the member mappings for Account
Employee Size.
If you want to edit a domain member mapping, click the Edit icon to display the Edit Domain
Member Mappings dialog box. Use this dialog box if you want to make changes to default
domain-mapping values. For example, you could change the range values or click Add Range
Domain Member Mapping to create a new range.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 12


Using Batch Edit
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can set up a target domain by using the Batch Edit option
to update multiple target domain members with the same value.
Multi-select one or more rows in the table. Select a value from the Batch Edit drop-down list.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Click Change to apply the selected value to all specified members.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Using batch edit is useful for large domains with many member mappings that require the
same value. In the Tasks bar, click Manage Domains and Mappings, display the Domain
mappings tab, select the Domain that you want to edit, and then click the Edit Domain
Member Mappings icon in the Domain Member Mappings pane to display the Edit Domain
Member Mappings dialog box.
To use batch edit, select one or more rows in the table, select a value from the Batch Edit
drop-down list, and then click Change to apply the value selected in the Batch Edit drop-down
list to all specified members.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 13


Using Sync To Source
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can set up a non-ranged target domain using the Sync To


Source option to automatically synchronize a target domain
with values from the source domain.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In some scenarios, you might not know what target domain member values should be when
you deploy Oracle BI Applications. For example, in Order Management or Supply Chain
Analytics, UOM (Unit of Measurement) is typically not known until deployment time.
You can set up a non-ranged target domain using the Sync To Source option to automatically
synchronize a target domain with values from the source domain. This process inserts new
target members from the source domain and automatically generates 1:1 mappings. This is
useful for large domains with many member mappings that might otherwise take a long time
to set up. Sync To Source is only available for extensible non-ranged domains.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 14


Data Load Parameters
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Data load parameters are configuration values that specify how


source system data is loaded into the OBAW.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Global parameter Warning icon

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

To view and manage data load parameters, select Tasks > Data Load Parameters
Administration > Manage Data Load Parameters to open the Manage Data Load Parameters
page in Configuration Manager. Use the Search section to specify source instance, offering,
fact group, and so on. In the example in the slide, data load parameters are shown for the
Oracle Financial Analytics offering.
Data load parameters can be either global or application-specific.
Global parameters apply to all applications and are indicated by the (ab) and globe icon.
Global data load parameters can also be associated with specific fact groups or dimension
groups.
Application-specific parameters apply to specific applications and are indicated by the (ab)
icon. Application-specific data load parameters are always associated with one or more fact
groups or dimension groups.
Some parameters have a warning icon that indicates that this parameter value must be set
before running a full load.
Some parameters have a read-only icon that indicates that this parameter value cannot be
edited.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 15


Editing Data Load Parameters
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Select a data load parameter and click Edit.

2. A warning message is displayed 3. Use Edit Dialog to


for global parameters. edit the parameter.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example in the slide, the Slowly Changing Dimension Flag parameter is selected. This
parameter indicates whether the slowly changing dimension type 2 flag is set for dimensions
or dimension groups.
Notice that this is a global parameter and the Global Parameter Value is set to No. If the
Global Parameter that you edit is associated with fact groups or dimension groups, then a
warning message is displayed to verify that you want to update the value for all associated
fact groups and dimension groups. If you click Yes at the warning message, then the values
of all occurrences of the parameter at the group level will be updated to the new value.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 16


Editing Group-Specific Parameter Values
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Select a data load parameter.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


3. Edit the
2. Click Edit for an associated parameter value.
group-specific parameter value.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example in the slide, the Slowly Changing Dimension Flag data load parameter is
selected, and the Group Specific Parameter Values pane is visible. This pane shows the
value of the Slowly Changing Dimension Flag parameter for specific dimension groups within
the Oracle Financial Analytics offering.
In this example, the Business Location Dimension group-specific parameter value is selected.
To edit the group-specific parameter value, click the Edit icon on the toolbar to open the Edit
Dialog dialog box. Notice that you can change the parameter value by selecting from a list of
values: Yes or No in this example. The fields that are displayed in this dialog box are different,
depending on the type of parameter being edited. For example, the parameter data type might
be Boolean, date, multi-value select list of values, number, single-value select list of values,
string, and so on. It is also possible to edit more than one group-specific parameter value by
using the Edit All icon (two pencils).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 17


Reporting Parameters
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Reporting parameters are configuration values that specify how


data is presented in Oracle Business Intelligence dashboards.

Click to edit.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Click to edit.

Select Manage Reporting Parameters.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the Tasks bar, select Manage Reporting Parameters to view or edit reporting parameters.
In the example in the slide, the Global tab is selected. Global parameters apply to all
applications. Application-specific parameters apply to specific applications. To edit a reporting
parameter, select the parameter in the parameter list, and then either click the Edit icon or
click the value in the Parameter Value column.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 18


Exporting and Importing Setup Data
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can export and import setup data for Configuration


Manager.
Click the Export icon.

Provide an export file name.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select the objects to export.

Export file details


Select Export
Setup Data.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can export and import setup data for Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager to:
Make a backup of your configuration settings for security purposes. For example, you
might keep a record of the configuration changes that you have made.
Migrate the Setup Data for Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager from one
environment to another environment. For example, you might move the configuration
changes that you have made from a Test environment to a Production environment.
In the Tasks bar, select Export Setup Data and then click the Export icon to display the Export
dialog box. Name the export file and use the Export dialog box to specify the setup objects
that you want to export. When you export setup data, you can export only the changes that
you have made to the values of the following objects: data load parameters, domains and
mappings, reporting parameters, and system setups. Unchanged configuration values are not
exported. For example, if you only change the value of DEFAULT_CURRENCY from USD to
Euro and then you export your data, then the export zip file that is produced will contain only
columns for DEFAULT_ CURRENCY=Euro. The Export Details pane (in the Export Setup
Data pane) displays the details of the selected export file.
To import setup data, select Tasks > Import Setup Data and follow a process similar to
importing an exported file. When you import setup data from a zip file, you import whatever
configuration changes were exported to that zip file.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 19


Monitoring Setup Data
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Overview page to monitor setup data to ensure that


your offerings are correctly configured.

Drill into reports

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


for more detail.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can use the Reports panes on the Overview page to monitor setup data. For example:
Use the System Setups list to monitor which Offerings have been enabled for
deployment.
Use the Parameters By Offerings report to monitor visually the number of parameters
that have been configured.
Use the Load Plan Executions report to monitor load plans.
Use the Domain Mappings by Offerings report to monitor domain mappings.
You can drill into each report for more detailed information. For example, drilling on the
Parameters bar graph in the Parameters By Offerings report will take you to a list of
parameters by offering. Drilling on the Parameters with no values bar in the graph will open
a page where you can view and edit parameters with unassigned values.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 20


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements about domains is incorrect?


a. Domains are pre-seeded dimensional values that help
define business metrics.
b. Domains are configuration values that specify how source
system data is loaded into the OBAW.
c. Domains are typically located in the source system.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. If domains are not available in a source system, then they
can be sourced from a flat file.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 21


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements describe domain member


mappings?
a. Data fields in a source system application are referred to
as domain member mappings.
b. Domain member mappings specify how domain member
data in a source system is extracted and loaded into

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


domain member data in the OBAW.
c. Regular domains have members consisting of a single
value.
d. Band domains have members consisting of two values that
specify a range.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b, c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 22


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Batch edit is useful for large domains with many member


mappings that require different values.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b
Batch edit is useful for large domains with many member mappings that require the same
value.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 23


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements describe data load


parameters?
a. Data load parameters are configuration values that specify
how source system data is loaded into the OBAW.
b. Data load parameters can be either global or application-
specific.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Some parameters have a warning icon that indicates that
this parameter value must be set before running a full load.
d. Some parameters have a read-only icon that indicates this
parameter value cannot be edited.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 24


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not a reason for exporting setup data?


a. To make a backup of your configuration settings for
security purposes
b. To automatically synchronize a target domain with values
from the source domain
c. To migrate the setup data for Oracle BI Applications

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Configuration Manager from one environment to another
environment
d. To monitor setup data to ensure that your offerings are
correctly configured

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 25


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to use Oracle BI


Applications Configuration Manager and Functional Setup
Manager (FSM) to administer and maintain functional
configuration data for Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 26


Practice
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

8-1: Maintaining and Administering Functional Configuration


Data

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 8 - 27


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Managing Load Plans

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to use Oracle


BI Applications Configuration Manager to create, generate,
execute, and monitor a load plan.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 2


Load Plans
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A load plan is:


An executable object that comprises and organizes the
child objects (referred to as steps) that carry out the ETL
process
Defined in Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager
Generated to build it as an object in the ODI repository

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Executed to perform the ETL process

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A load plan is an executable object that comprises and organizes the child objects (referred to
as steps) that carry out the ETL process. A load plan is made up of a sequence of several
types of steps. Each step can contain several child steps. Depending on the step type, the
steps can be executed conditionally, in parallel or sequentially.
You define a load plan in Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager by selecting a data
source and one or more fact groups. This selection determines which steps need to be
performed during the ETL process. Each fact group belongs to a specific functional area or
areas that are associated with one or more offerings, which, in turn, are related to a data
server. A transactional data source is associated with one or more data servers.
After you define the load plan, you then generate it to build it in the ODI repository. You then
execute the load plan to perform the ETL process.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 3


Overview of a Load Plan Life Cycle
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A load plan life cycle comprises the following phases:

Phase 1: Phase 2: Phase 3: Phase 4:


Define Load Generate Load Execute Load Monitor Load
Plan Plan Plan Plan

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A load plan life cycle comprises the following phases:


Phase 1: Define load plan. In this phase, you define load plan properties in Oracle BI
Applications Configuration Manager. You select a data source and one or more fact groups,
and this selection determines the steps to be performed during the ETL process.
Phase 2: Generate load plan. In this phase, you launch a generation process from Oracle BI
Applications Configuration Manager that propagates the load plan properties to the ODI
repository, where the load plan is built.
Phase 3: Execute load plan. In this phase, you start a load plan run from Oracle BI
Applications Configuration Manager, which executes the steps of the load plan. Executing a
load plan creates a load plan instance and a first load plan run. If a run is restarted, a new
load plan run is created under this load plan instance. Each execution attempt of the load plan
instance is preserved as a different load plan run in the log.
Phase 4: Monitor load plan. In this phase, you monitor the load plan run on the Load Plan
Details page of Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager. The Load Plan Details page
provides a view of the ODI repository through Oracle Data Integrator Console.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 4


Defining a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Click Add on the Manage Specify the load plan name,


1 Load Plans page. 2 description, type, and source.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select fact groups to include Save the load plan to
3 in the load plan definition. 4 display it in the master list.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Perform the following steps to define a load plan in Configuration Manager:


1. In the Tasks pane of Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager, select Manage
Load Plans, which appears under the Load Plans Administration heading. The Manage
Load Plans page is displayed. On the Load Plans toolbar, click the Add icon. The Create
Load Plan page is displayed.
2. On the first page of the Create Load Plan series, specify the load plan name,
description, type, and source. Load plan types include:
- Source Extract (SDE): Includes only those tasks that extract from the source and
loads data into staging tables.
- Source Extract and Load (SDE, SIL, and PLP): Includes all tasks to extract from
the source and load the data warehouse tables.
- Warehouse Load (SIL and PLP): Includes only those tasks that extract from the
staging tables and load the data warehouse tables.
- Domain-Only: Includes all tasks required to extract domain-related records from
the source and load the data into the domain-related tables in the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 5


3. On the second page of the Create Load Plan series, select the fact groups that you want
to include in the load plan definition. Note that fact groups may belong to a hierarchy of
fact groups. You can select only the top-level parent fact group and not a child fact
group. A load plan must contain at least one fact group, and multiple fact groups may be
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

selected from one or more data sources.


4. Save the load plan definition to display it in the Load Plans master list.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 6


Generating a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select the load plan that Click the Generate icon


you want to generate. to start the process.

Use the Generation Status Click the Refresh icon to


field to monitor progress. refresh the display.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


The Succeeded icon indicates that
generation completed successfully.

Possible generation statuses:


Starting In Progress Succeeded Failed

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you generate a load plan, the load plan is built in the ODI repository. A load plan must
be generated successfully before it can be executed. Note: Load plans must be generated
serially or the process will fail. Do not launch a second load plan generation if one is already
underway. You must wait until the first generation process completes before you launch the
next generation process.
To generate a load plan:
1. In the Load Plans master list, select the load plan that you want to generate.
2. In the Load Plans toolbar, click the Generate icon.
3. Use the Generation Status field to monitor progress. Click the Refresh icon to refresh
the display.
4. When the generation process completes, the Succeeded icon is displayed in the
Generation Status field.
You can execute a load plan or schedule it for execution after it has been successfully
generated.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 7


Executing a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select the load plan that Click the Execute icon to display
you want to execute. the Execute Load Plan dialog box.

Specify the context, logical agent,


and ODI Work Repository.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Use the Execution Status
field to monitor progress.

Possible execution statuses:


Starting In Progress Succeeded Failed Not executed

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can only execute a load plan if it was successfully generated. You can have separate
load plans for each source, but load plans should not run in parallel.
To execute a load plan:
1. In the Load Plans list, select the load plan that you want to execute.
2. On the Load Plans toolbar, click the Execute icon to display the load plan dialog box.
3. Specify the following information in the load plan dialog box:
- Context: The ODI context to be used when the load plan is run (Note that Global is
the only supported context.)
- Local Agent: The ODI local agent to be used when the load plan is run.
- ODI Work Repository: The name of the ODI Work Repository
4. Use the Execution Status field to monitor execution progress.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 8


Monitoring a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select the load plan that Click the Show Execution Status
you want to monitor. Details icon to open ODI Console.

ODI Console navigation pane Load plan execution details

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Execution status

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can monitor a load plan run by viewing the execution status information on the Load Plan
Execution Details page of Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager.
To view load plan execution details:
1. In the Load Plans master list, select the load plan whose run you want to view.
2. On the Load Plans toolbar, click the Show Execution Status Details icon. The Oracle
Data Integrator Console login screen is displayed (not shown in the slide).
3. Log in to Oracle Data Integrator Console by entering an appropriate user ID and
password.
4. ODI Console is displayed.
Within ODI Console, the navigation pane is displayed in the left pane and the Load Plan
Execution page for the selected load plan is displayed in the right pane. The Load Plan
Execution page displays the load plan execution name and load plan details. You can use the
Load Plan Execution page to view detailed information about the definition and execution
status of the load plan.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 9


Copying a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Copying a load plan enables you to define a new load plan with
the same fact groups as the selected load plan definition, but
with a different name and identifier.

Select the desired load plan and click Copy.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Modify the load plan information.

The same fact groups are selected.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

1. In Configuration Manager, in the Load Plans list, select the load plan that you want to
copy.
2. On the Load Plans toolbar, click the Copy icon to display the Copy Load Plan page.
3. On the first page of the Copy Load Plan series, modify the load plan information.
4. On the second page of the Copy Load Plan series, verify that the same fact groups are
selected.
5. Save the copied load plan.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 10


Stopping a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can stop a load plan run in ODI Console or ODI Studio.
ODI Console ODI Studio

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can stop a load plan run from the Load Plan Execution page in Configuration Manager
(click Show Execution Status Details on the toolbar) or from ODI Studio. To stop a load plan
run from ODI Studio:
1. In Operator Navigator, select the running or waiting load plan run to stop from the Load
Plan Executions accordion.
2. Right-click the load plan and select Stop Normal or Stop Immediate.
- Stop Normal: In normal stop mode, the agent in charge of stopping the load plan
sends a Stop Normal signal to each agent running a session for this load plan.
Each agent will wait for the completion of the current task of the session and then
end the session in error. Exception steps will not be executed by the load plan
and, once all exceptions are finished, the load plan is moved to an error state.
- Stop Immediate: In immediate stop mode, the agent in charge of stopping the
load plan sends a Stop Immediate signal to each agent running a session for this
load plan. Each agent will immediately end the session in error and not wait for the
completion of the current task of the session. Exception steps will not be executed
by the load plan and, once all exceptions are finished, the load plan is moved to an
error state.
3. In the Stop Load Plan dialog box (not shown here), select an agent to stop the load plan
and click OK.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 11


Overview of Restarting a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When you execute a load plan, you may need to restart


the load plan after a failure.
Examples of reasons for load plan failure include:
Problem with access either to the source or target database
Failure of the ODI agent
Problem with space or storage

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Problem with data

Failed load plan

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you run ETL to load data from a source system into the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse (OBAW), you may need to restart the ETL load after a failure. Examples of
circumstances and reasons for load plan failure include:
Problem with access either to the source or target database due to network failure or
expired or otherwise incorrect usernames and passwords
Failure of the ODI agent
Problem with space or storage (For example, you are able to connect to the source or
target database, but the query fails to run due to lack of temp space, disk space, and so
on. For files, it could be due to inadequate space where the file needs to be placed.)
Problem with data (for example, incorrect data with lengths larger than the target column
can hold, or null values in Not Null columns)
After such a failure during ETL, to avoid restarting the entire load plan after a failure, which
would require inefficient re-runs of all ETL tasks, you must restart the load from the same
point in its execution once the cause of failure has been diagnosed and resolved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 12


Understanding Restartability Grain
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When you restart a load plan after a failure, you may not
be able to restart from the exact point of failure.
To maintain data integrity in the case of restart, the grain
will vary depending on:
The location in the step hierarchy of the failed step
The Restart setting for the step

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Restart setting for steps

Parallel step

Serial step

Scenario step

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you restart a load plan after a failure, you may not be able to restart from the exact
point of failure, depending on where it occurred and on dependencies between load plan
steps. The goal of restartability is that the result of the load plan execution is the same
regardless of any load plan failure.
To maintain data integrity in the case of restart, the grain varies depending on the location in
the step hierarchy of the failed step and on the restart setting for the step.
Within the Steps Hierarchy, you can view the restart setting of a step in the Restart column.
The default settings for different steps in the hierarchy support data integrity in restarts:
Root steps are set to Restart from Failure if serial and Restart from failed Children if
parallel.
Substeps are set to Restart from Failure if serial and Restart from failed Children if
parallel.
Scenario steps are set to Restart from Failed Step.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 13


The following examples highlight the implications for each type of load plan step.
Serial Load Plan Step
Serial steps are represented by a vertical icon in the load plan steps hierarchy and, by default,
have a restart setting of Restart from Failure. In a case where the load plan fails when
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

running such a step to load a dimension group with multiple serial substeps loading individual
dimensions, the load plan, on restart, starts from the individual substep that failed. Any
successfully completed serial substeps are not run again.
Parallel Load Plan Step
Parallel steps are represented by a horizontal icon in the load plan steps hierarchy and, by
default, have a restart setting of Restart from Failed Children. In a typical run, a parallel step
with five parallel substeps under it has all five substeps executed in parallel, subject to free
sessions being available. If two of those five steps complete and then the load plan fails, all
the steps that did not complete or failed would be started again when the load plan is

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


restarted.
Scenario Step
At the lowest order in any load plan are the scenario steps. While the parent steps, whether
serial or parallel, are used to set the dependencies, the scenario steps are those that load the
tables. A scenario step in turn may have one or more substeps, corresponding to the number
of steps inside the package. In the case of a scenario-step failure during execution, the
scenario step may have multiple steps, all under the same session in the operator log, but
identified with different step numbers: 0, 1, 2, and so on. If the plan is restarted, the scenario
executes from the failed parent scenario step, re-running all substeps.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 14


Restarting a Load Plan
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Select the failed load plan and click Restart.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Monitor the restarted instance of the load plan.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can use ODI Studio or ODI Console to restart a load plan.
The slide shows how to restart a load plan using ODI Console.
1. In ODI Console, navigate to Runtime > Sessions/Load Plan Executions and select the
load plan execution that has failed.
2. Click the Restart button. The Restart button is displayed only when the selected load
plan is the most recent run of the load plan. The restart option is enabled only on the last
run for a load plan. A load plan can be restarted any number of times and each time it
progresses from the last failure.
3. A new instance of the load plan is generated.
4. Monitor the load plan.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 15


Restarting a Session
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

It is also possible to restart a session. To avoid restarting the entire load plan after a failure,
which would require inefficient re-runs of all ETL tasks, you can restart the load from the same
point in its execution once the cause of failure has been diagnosed and resolved.
You can use ODI Studio or ODI Console to restart a session. The slide shows how to restart a
session using ODI Console.
1. In ODI Console, navigate to Runtime > Sessions/Load Plan Executions and select the
session that has failed.
2. Click the Restart button. The Restart button is displayed only when the selected session
has failed.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 16


Troubleshooting Load Plans
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A load plan must be restarted when it has stopped with an


error or is non-responsive.
Use the following checklist to assist in troubleshooting a
non-responsive load plan:
1. Check the maximum number of sessions set to run against
the agent.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


2. Clean out stale sessions.
3. Check whether the agent is alive.
4. Verify that the ODI repository and the server hosting it are
running and have not experienced a failure.
5. If your load plan is in error and you have verified all of the
above, restart the load plan.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A load plan must be restarted when it has stopped with an error. An alternate case where
restart may be required is when a load plan is not doing anything at all (for example, when a
load plan is executed and nothing has changed after 30 minutes). Use the following checklist
to assist in troubleshooting a nonresponsive load plan:
1. Check the maximum number of sessions set to run against the agent. In ODI Operator,
verify that the number of sessions running is equal to the maximum. If so, then the other
sessions are waiting for the running sessions to complete. Proceed to the next step.
2. Clean out stale sessions. Stale sessions are sessions that are incorrectly left in a
running state after an agent or repository crash. If an agent crashes or loses its
connection to the repository after it has started a session, it is not able to update the
status of the session in the repository, and such a session becomes stale. Until the stale
session is cleaned, it shows up as running in the repository but actually is not.
3. Check whether the agent is alive. To test the agent to see whether it is running and still
has a connection to the repository, open it in the Topology Navigator in ODI Studio and
select the Test tab. If the agent test fails, restart the agent after fixing the issue.
4. Verify that the ODI repository and the server hosting it are running and have not
experienced a failure.
5. If your load plan is in error and you have verified all of the above, restart the Load plan.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 17


Using Mark as Complete
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When you mark a load plan step as complete, it ensures that


when the load plan is restarted, the marked step is not
executed.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Right-click a failed step and select Mark as Complete.

The step status changes from Error to Done.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In most cases, the load plan restart method described earlier in this lesson is the
recommended approach. This approach ensures data integrity and leaves no scope for
manual error. However, at times you may want to run a load plan step manually. For example,
if a step is inserting duplicate records that are causing failure, rerunning the step would still
insert duplicates. In such a case, you may need to manually correct the data outside of the
load plan and then skip that step when you restart the load plan.
For this kind of situation, you can use the Mark as Complete option. When you mark a load
plan step as complete, it ensures that when the load plan is restarted, the marked step is not
executed. It is then the responsibility of the person making this setting to ensure that the load
for that step is carried out outside the load plan.
To mark a step as complete, right-click the step and select Mark as Complete. This can be
done at the scenario step or at any step higher than that. Marking a step complete at a higher
level in the step hierarchy means that none of the child steps under that parent step is
executed upon load plan restart, even if it is otherwise eligible. For this reason, marking a step
as complete should be treated as an advanced task and must be done only with a full
understanding of its impact. There is no single recommendation that pertains in all cases, so
the setting must be done carefully and only on a case-by-case basis.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 18


Running a Stand-Alone Scenario
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can fix a failed scenario step and run it individually outside
the load plan to complete the load.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you are monitoring a load plan, you may not know how to completely fix a scenario-
step failure, but may wish to use the Mark as Complete option for the failed scenario step
instead of waiting for complete resolution. This prevents a step failure from precluding an
entire load plan from completing, while allowing you to inform the ETL team about the failed
scenario step so that they can work on a solution. The ETL team might then fix the scenario
and want to run it stand-alone outside the load plan to complete the load. You can use ODI
Studio or ODI Console to run a stand-alone scenario. The slide shows how to run a stand-
alone scenario by using ODI Console.
In ODI Console, navigate to Runtime > Scenarios/Load Plan Executions and select the
scenario.
Click the Execute button. You can also right-click the scenario and select Execute.
As in marking a step as complete, running a stand-alone scenario should be treated as an
advanced task and the person running the scenario must be aware of the following:
A scenario run outside of a load plan by itself invokes the Table Maintenance process.
This could, depending on the setting, truncate the table before the load.
A scenario step could have many variable values set, either dynamically in the case of a
refresh variable or explicitly by overriding its value at that scenario step in the load plan.
When running a scenario outside the load plan, all the scenario variables would have
only their default values. For this reason, care should be taken to set the variables
appropriately before calling a scenario from outside the load plan.
Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 19
Managing Load Plans: Fact Groups Tab
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use this tab to view the fact groups associated with a load plan
selected in the Load Plans list.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use this tab to view the fact groups associated with a load plan selected in the Load Plans
list. The fact groups displayed may belong to a hierarchy of fact groups. You can expand the
fact group node to view the hierarchy. If a fact group is a child of another fact group in a
hierarchy, it appears twice in the tree table, because it is associated with both the functional
area and the parent fact group.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 20


Managing Load Plans: Data Load Parameters Tab
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use this tab to view and edit the data load parameters
associated with a load plan selected in the Load Plans list.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use this tab to view and edit the data load parameters associated with a load plan selected in
the Load Plans list. The Data Load Parameters list includes both application-specific and
global parameters. Application-specific parameters are associated with one or more fact
groups included in the load plan definition. Global parameters apply to all applications and
can also be associated with specific fact groups. Key points to note about the Data Load
Parameters tab:
If a listed parameter requires a value but a value has not been assigned, the respective
row in the table is tagged with an error icon. Parameters that do not require a value
(value can be null) are not tagged even if no value has been assigned.
You can filter the list of parameters to display only the data load parameters that have
no value by using the Show drop-down list in the toolbar.
You can export and save content displayed in the table to a Microsoft Excel formatted
file by clicking the Export icon on the toolbar.
You can change a parameter value by selecting the parameter in the list, and then
clicking the Edit icon on the toolbar. The Edit Parameter Value dialog box is displayed.
To change a parameter value, the user must have been assigned a role that has the
appropriate privilege.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 21


Managing Load Plans:
Domains and Mappings Tab
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Domains and Mappings tab to view and edit domains
and mappings related to a load plan selected in the Load Plan
list.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use the Domains and Mappings tab to view and edit domains and mappings related to a load
plan selected in the Load Plan list. The domains and mappings are associated with the fact
group included in the load plan definition. Key points to note about the Domains and
Mappings tab:
If a source domain in the list contains members that have not been mapped to an
appropriate warehouse domain member, the row in the table is tagged with an error
icon. Some source domain members are not applicable, and, therefore, are not tagged
even if they are unmapped.
You can filter the list of mappings to display only the domains that have unmapped
source members using the Show drop-down list in the toolbar.
You can export and save content displayed in the table to a Microsoft Excel formatted
file by clicking the Export icon on the toolbar.
You can change a domain mapping by selecting the mapping in the list and then clicking
the Edit icon on the toolbar. The Edit Domain Member Mappings dialog box is displayed.
To change a domain member mapping, the user must have been assigned a role that
has the appropriate privilege.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 22


Managing Load Plans: Schedules Tab
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Schedules tab to view, create, edit, and delete


schedules for the execution of a load plan.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use the Schedules tab to view, create, edit, and delete schedules for the execution of a load
plan. A load plan schedule includes the following required properties:
Context: The ODI context to be used when the load plan is run (Note that Global is the
only supported context.)
Logical Agent: The ODI Agent to be used when the load plan is run
Recurrence: The frequency of occurrence
Status: The status of the schedule
Scheduled Time: The date and time the load plan is to be executed

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 23


Resetting the Data Warehouse
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Resetting the data warehouse truncates the


W_ETL_LOAD_DATES table and ensures that the subsequent
load will truncate all target tables and do a fresh full load.

Select Actions > Execute Reset Data Warehouse Scenario.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Set the context, logical agent,
and ODI Work Repository.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Select Actions > Execute Reset Data Warehouse Scenario. This command resets the data
warehouse by truncating the W_ETL_LOAD_DATES table. This ensures that the subsequent
load will truncate all target tables and do a fresh full load.
In the Execute Reset Data Warehouse Scenario Dialog, set the Context, Agent, and ODI
Work Repository and click OK.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 24


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following does not describe a load plan?


a. Generated to build it as an object in the ODI repository
b. An executable object that comprises and organizes the
child objects that carry out the ETL process
c. Queried to perform the ETL process
d. Defined in Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 25


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A load plan must be generated successfully before it can be


executed.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 26


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When you restart a load plan after a failure, you must restart
from the exact point of failure.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b
When you restart a load plan after a failure, you may not be able to restart from the exact
point of failure, depending on where it occurred and on dependencies between load plan
steps. The goal of restartability is that the result of the load plan execution is the same
regardless of any load plan failure.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 27


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following should you use to troubleshoot a non-


responsive load plan?
a. Verify that the ODI repository and the server hosting it are
running and have not experienced a failure.
b. Check whether the agent is alive.
c. Verify that Scenario steps are set to Restart from Failed

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Child.
d. Check the maximum number of sessions set to run against
the agent.
e. Clean out stale sessions.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, d, e

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 28


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following are alternate options for restarting load


plans?
a. Using Mark as Incomplete.
b. Running a stand-alone session.
c. Using Mark as Complete.
d. Running a stand-alone scenario.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 29


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to use Oracle BI


Applications Configuration Manager to create, generate,
execute, and monitor a load plan.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 30


Practices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

9-1: Defining and Executing a Domain-Only Load Plan


9-2: Defining and Executing a Source-Dependent Extract
(SDE) Load Plan
9-3: Defining and Executing a Source-Independent Load
(SIL) Load Plan

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 9 - 31


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Analytics Warehouse

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Customizing the Oracle Business

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to describe the


concepts and techniques for customizing the extract, transform,
and load (ETL) functionality in Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications (OBIA).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 2


Customization
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In Oracle Business Intelligence Applications, customization


is defined as changing the preconfigured behavior to
enable you to analyze new information in your business
intelligence dashboards.
To accommodate new data, preconfigured OBIA objects
can be modified:

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW) star schema
objects
Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) ETL metadata objects
OBIA metadata repository
OBIA presentation objects (dashboards)
The focus of this lesson is the customization of OBAW star
schema objects and ODI ETL metadata objects.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In Oracle Business Intelligence Applications, customization is defined as changing the


preconfigured behavior to enable you to analyze new information in your business intelligence
dashboards.
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications ship with a collection of preconfigured objects,
including star schema tables, a metadata repository, presentation objects (dashboards), and
Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) ETL metadata. These preconfigured objects may not completely
accommodate the analysis needs of a business. To accommodate new data, the
preconfigured objects can be modified.
Customization is the process by which the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW)
objects, Oracle Business Intelligence Applications metadata and presentation objects, and
ODI ETL metadata objects, are modified to accommodate new data for analysis.
This lesson describes concepts and techniques for customizing the ETL functionality in
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications. This includes the customization of OBAW star
schema objects and ODI ETL metadata objects. These objects are customized using ODI
Studio.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 3


Customization Categories
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Categories are grouped by category based on data source type


and modification type.

Data Warehouse Modifications

Additional Additional
Additional rows

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


columns tables

Packaged
Data sources

Category 1 Configure filter Category 2


application

Nonpackaged
Category 1 Category 3 Category 2
data

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The type of data source that you have determines the type of customization that you can do.
Data sources can be one of the following types:
Packaged applications (for example, Oracle E-Business Suite), which use prepackaged
adapters
Nonpackaged data sources, which use the Universal adapter
Customizations are grouped into the following categories:
Category 1: In a Category 1 customization, you add additional columns from source
systems that have prepackaged adapters and load the data into existing Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse tables.
Category 2: In a Category 2 customization, you use prepackaged adapters to add new
fact or dimension tables to the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse. Category 2
customizations normally require that you build new source-dependent extract (SDE) and
source-independent load (SIL) mappings.
Category 3: In a Category 3 customization, you use the Universal adapter to load data
from sources that do not have prepackaged adapters.
This lesson and the next two lessons focus on Category 1 and Category 2 customizations.
For more information about Category 3 customizations, refer to the Oracle Fusion Middleware
Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 4


Category 1 Customization: Overview
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Category 1 customizations add additional columns from source


systems that have prepackaged adapters and load the data into
existing Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse tables.

OLTP OBAW OBAW

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


HZ_LOCATIONS W_GEO_DS W_GEO_D
DESCRIPTION X_DESCRIPTION X_DESCRIPTION

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Category 1 customizations involve extracting additional columns from source systems for
which prepackaged adapters are included (for example, Oracle E-Business Suite) and loading
the data into existing Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse tables.
For Category 1 customizations, data can also come from nonpackaged sources, but this
assumes that the sources have already been mapped with a Universal adapter and only need
to be extended to capture additional columns.
In the example in the slide, you would use the DESCRIPTION column in the HZ_LOCATIONS
table in the source system to capture data related to locations. You would then run a load plan
to load the data into a custom column, X_DESCRIPTION, in the W_GEO_DS dimensionstaging
table in the data warehouse, and ultimately into a custom column, X_DESCRIPTION, in the
W_GEO_D dimension table in the data warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 5


Category 1 Customization: Extending Mappings
and Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Existing mappings and tables are extensible.


Sample placeholders demonstrate how to pass and store
additional data.
Oracle BI Applications provides a methodology to extend
preconfigured mappings to include additional columns and
load the data into existing tables.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Do not modify existing logic or columns.
Copy objects to custom folders before modifying.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In order to see additional columns in the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse, the columns
must first be passed through the ETL process. The existing mappings and tables are
extensible. Oracle Business Intelligence Applications provides a methodology to extend
preconfigured mappings to include these additional columns and load the data into existing
tables.
Oracle Business Intelligence Applications recognizes two types of customization: extension
and modification. The supported extension logic allows you to add to existing objects. For
example, you can extract additional columns from a source, pass them through existing
mappings, and populate new columns added to an existing table.
Generally, Oracle Business Intelligence Applications does not allow you to modify existing
logic or columns. You should copy existing logic to custom folders, and then modify it. You
should not change existing calculations to use different columns, and you should not remap
existing columns to be loaded from different sources.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 6


Category 1 Customization: Safe Path
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Most datastores have a single placeholder column named


X_CUSTOM.
Each ETL task has mapping expressions to populate this
column, which marks a safe path through the ETL task.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Preconfigured Preconfigured Preconfigured
source logic target

Extension Extension Extension

Customizations run
parallel to existing logic.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Most datastores have a single placeholder column named X_CUSTOM. Each ETL task has
mapping expressions to populate this column, which marks a safe path through the ETL task.
These serve as templates for customizing ODI datastores and interfaces. When creating new
custom columns, follow the naming convention of including the X_ prefix to help distinguish
custom columns.
In the figure in the slide, the preconfigured logic is shaded in gray. You should not modify
anything contained within these objects. You should add customizations to existing objects
rather than creating new packages and interfaces, which allows them to run parallel to the
existing logic.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 7


Category 1 Customization: Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Create custom SDE and SIL folders in ODI Studio.


2. Create a version of the task folder to be customized.
3. Copy the preconfigured task folder to the custom folder.
4. Create versions of the copied task folder.
5. Create versions of the model.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


6. Edit the target datastores.
7. Map the new column in the interface.
8. Generate DDL scripts.
9. Execute the DDL procedure.
10. Modify the scenario naming convention.
11. Generate scenarios.
12. Generate a load plan.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The most common reason for extending the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse is to
extract existing columns from a source system and map them to an existing Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse table (either fact or dimension). This type of change typically requires
you to extend the interfaces within an SIL package. If the data is coming from a packaged
source, then you will also need to extend the interfaces within an appropriate SDE adapter
package. If the data is coming from a nonpackaged source, then you must use a Universal
adapter package. If an appropriate package does not already exist, you will need to create a
Universal adapter package with interfaces.
This slide and the next slide list the typical steps needed for a Category 1 customization. The
steps are provided here to give you a high-level overview of the Category 1 customization
process. Do not be concerned with the step details at this point. These steps are covered in
more detail in Lesson 11: Building a Category 1 Customization.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 8


Category 1 Customization: Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

13. Open the generated load plan.


14. Update the load plan step.
15. Execute the load plan.
16. Verify that the data is loaded.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 9


Category 2 Customization: Overview
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Category 2 customizations use prepackaged adapters to


add new fact or dimension tables to the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse.
Category 2 customizations normally require that you build
new source-dependent extract (SDE) and source-
independent load (SIL) objects.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


OLTP OBAW OBAW

PARTNER WC_PARTNER_DS WC_PARTNER_D


PARTNER_NAME PARTNER_NAME PARTNER_NAME

PARTNER_LOC PARTNER_LOC PARTNER_LOC

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In a Category 2 customization, you use prepackaged adapters to add new fact or dimension
tables to the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse. Category 2 customizations normally
require that you build new SDE and SIL mappings.
A typical Category 2 customization involves building entirely new tables that will be loaded
with data from a source table that is not already extracted from. For example, you might want
to create a new PARTNER dimension table. In this case, you create new dimension and
staging tables as well as new extract and load ETL mappings.
In the example in the slide, you would use the PARTNER table in the source system to capture
data related to partners. You would then load the data into a new dimension staging table and
subsequently a new dimension table in the data warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 10


Category 2 Customization: Required Columns
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

For staging tables:


INTEGRATION_ID, DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
For dimension and fact tables:
INTEGRATION_ID, DATASOURCE_NUM_ID, ROW_WID,
ETL_PROC_WID

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Stores the primary key or unique identifier of a
INTEGRATION_ID
record as in the source table
Stores the data source from which the data is
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
extracted
Is the sequence number generated during the ETL
ROW_WID
process; used as a unique identifier

Stores the ID of the ETL process information in


ETL_PROC_WID
W_ETL_RUN_S in the data warehouse

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you create a new dimension or fact table, use the required system columns that are
part of each of the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse tables to maintain consistency and
enable you to reference existing table structures.
For staging tables, the following columns are required:
INTEGRATION_ID: Stores the primary key or the unique identifier of a record as in the
source table
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID: Stores the data source from which the data is extracted
For dimension and fact tables, the required columns are the INTEGRATION_ID and
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID columns as well as the following:
ROW_WID: A sequence number generated during the ETL process, which is used as a
unique identifier for the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
ETL_PROC_WID: Stores the ID of the ETL process information

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 11


Category 2 Customization: Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Create new tables in the OBAW.


2. Import the custom tables (datastores) into ODI.
3. Move the datastores to the appropriate submodels.
4. Set properties for the datastores.
5. Create an ODI sequence for the custom dimension.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


6. Create custom SDE and SIL tasks to load the dimension.
7. Extend the fact staging datastore.
8. Extend the fact datastore.
9. Add a foreign key constraint to the fact table.
10. Add a non-unique bitmap index to the fact table.
11. Create custom SDE and SIL tasks to load the fact table.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide lists the typical steps needed for a Category 2 customization where a new
dimension table is added to the OBAW. The steps are provided here to give you a high-level
overview of the Category 2 customization process. Do not be concerned with the step details
at this point. These steps are covered in more detail in Lesson 12: Building a Category 2
Customization.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 12


Additional Customization Considerations
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Understanding the DATASOURCE_NUM_ID column


Understanding the impact of patches on customizations
Using custom folders
Applying an update strategy
Creating indices

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Applying naming conventions
Using Configuration Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Each of these topics is covered in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 13


Understanding the DATASOURCE_NUM_ID Column
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

DATASOURCE_NUM_ID is part of the unique user key for all


tables in the warehouse schema.
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID permits rows to be loaded in the
same warehouse tables from different sources, provided
that the column is given a different value for each source.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The tables in the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse schema have


DATASOURCE_NUM_ID as part of their unique user key. While the transactional application
normally ensures that a primary key is unique, it is possible that a primary key is duplicated
between transactional systems.
To avoid problems when loading this data into the data warehouse, uniqueness is ensured by
including the DATASOURCE_NUM_ID as part of the user key. This means that the rows can
be loaded in the same data warehouse tables from different sources if this column is given a
different value for each data source.
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID is maintained in ODI. Make sure that each source system has a
unique value assigned to it. It is possible to have multiple instances of the same source
system (for example, a U.S.-based and a European-based Oracle transactional database
both loading into the same data warehouse). The two different transactional database
systems should be assigned different DATASOURCE_NUM_ID values in ODI.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 14


Understanding the Impact of
Patches on Customizations
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In some cases, you must reapply a customization to an object


that has been patched.
ODIs version-compare utility identifies the changes
introduced by the patch.
You only need to reapply customizations to mappings that
have been changed by the patch.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Use the ODI version-
compare utility to
compare versions.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In some cases, you must reapply a customization to an object that has been patched. For
example, if you install an Oracle Business Intelligence Applications patch that modifies the
Supply Chain and Order Management application, you might need to manually reapply
customizations that you have made to the Supply Chain and Order Management application.
As part of customizing an ETL task (including interfaces and package under a specific task
folder), you copy the task folder to be customized, version the original, and version the copy.
Any patches are applied to the current version of the original task. Leverage ODIs version-
compare utility to identify the changes introduced by the patch.
The copy is also versioned so that any changes introduced can be isolated. After a patch,
compare any changes with those introduced by the patch and verify that there is no conflict,
and then manually apply the same changes introduced by the patch to the customized ETL
tasks.
A patch only installs changed repository objects, not the entire ODI Work Repository.
Therefore, you only need to reapply customizations to mappings that have been changed by
the patch.
For example, if a patch only modifies the Supply Chain and Order Management application,
you only need to manually reapply customizations that you have made to the Supply Chain
and Order Management application. Customizations in other applications would not be
affected by the patch.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 15


Using Custom Folders
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

On the Designer tab in ODI Studio, select BI Apps Project >


Mappings > New Sub-Folder to create custom SDE and SIL
folders.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Custom folder for a
preconfigured SDE adaptor

Custom folder
for SIL objects

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You use ODI Studio to customize ETL objects. If you want to make changes to preconfigured
ODI objects, create a custom folder and make the changes in it. Do not change objects in any
of the preconfigured folders unless explicitly directed by Oracle. This is because
preconfigured folders and the objects within them may be overwritten in future upgrades.
Using custom folders is not required, but it is strongly recommended and considered a best
practice to make identifying customized content easier.
The preconfigured ODI repository does not include any custom folders. You must create your
own. You should create a custom folder for each prepackaged SDE Adaptor folder that you
have deployed that will have customizations. In the example in the slide, a custom folder is
created for the SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor folder.
You should also create a separate custom folder for customizations that you want to make to
objects in the SILOS folder. Do not store customized SDE and SIL objects in the same folder.
In the example in the slide, a CUSTOM_SILOS folder is created to hold custom SIL objects.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 16


Applying an Update Strategy
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Design a custom process to detect new and modified


records.
The process should be designed to load only changed
data.
If data is loaded without an incremental process, the
previously loaded data will be updated again.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Example logic in preconfigured SIL mappings:
1. A mapping looks up destination tables based on
INTEGRATION_ID and DATASOURCE_NUM_ID.
2. If the combination exists, ROW_WID is returned and the
record is updated.
3. If the combination does not exist, lookup returns NULL and
a record is inserted.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

For loading new fact and dimension tables, design a custom process on the source side to
detect the new and modified records. The SDE process should be designed to load only the
changed data (new and modified). If the data is loaded without the incremental process, the
data that was previously loaded will be erroneously updated again.
For example, the logic in the preconfigured SIL mappings looks up the destination tables
based on the INTEGRATION_ID and DATASOURCE_NUM_ID and returns the ROW_WID if
the combination exists, in which case it updates the record. If the lookup returns NULL, it
inserts the record instead. In some cases, last update date(s) stored in target tables are also
compared in addition to the columns specified above to determine insert or update. Look at
the similar mappings in the preconfigured folder for more details.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 17


Creating Indices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Define indices to improve query performance.


Staging tables typically do not require indices.
Create indices on all columns that the ETL uses for
dimensions and facts. For example:
ROW_WIDs of dimensions and facts
INTEGRATION_ID

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
Flags
Carefully consider on which columns to put filter
conditions.
Inspect preconfigured objects for guidance.
Register indices in the appropriate ODI model.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 18


Using Naming Conventions
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Name all the newly created tables with the prefix WC_.
This helps to visually isolate the new tables from the shipped
tables.
Keep good documentation of the customizations done.
This helps when upgrading your data warehouse.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


New datastore (table) with naming
convention in ODI Studio

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 19


Using Configuration Manager
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After making changes to ETL objects in ODI Studio, you can


use Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager to modify,
generate, execute, and monitor load plans that contain the
customized objects.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 20


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the correct statement about a Category 1


customization:
a. You use prepackaged adapters to add new fact or
dimension tables to the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse.
b. You use the Universal adapter to load data from sources

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


that do not have prepackaged adapters.
c. You add additional columns from source systems that
have prepackaged adapters and load the data into existing
Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse tables.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 21


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the incorrect statement about the safe path in a


Category 1 customization:
a. Each ETL task has mapping expressions to populate the
X_CUSTOM column, which marks a safe path through the
ETL task.
b. Add customizations to existing objects rather than creating

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


new packages and interfaces
c. All new custom columns must be named X_CUSTOM.
d. When creating new custom columns, include the X_ prefix
to help distinguish custom columns.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 22


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not a required column for dimension


and fact tables:
a. INTEGRATION_ID.
b. DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
c. W_ETL_RUN_S

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. ROW_WID
e. ETL_PROC_WID

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 23


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements about OBAW customization


are not true?
a. Leverage Configuration Manager's version-compare utility
to identify changes introduced by a patch.
b. ODI objects are customized using ODI Studio.
c. ODI objects are customized using ODI Configuration

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Manager.
d. The most common reason for extending the OBAW is to
extract existing columns from a source system and map
them to an existing OBAW table.
e. Leverage ODIs version-compare utility to identify changes
introduced by a patch.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 24


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to describe the


concepts and techniques for customizing the extract, transform,
and load (ETL) functionality in Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications (OBIA).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 25


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Practice

There are no practices for this lesson.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 10 - 26


Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Building a Category 1 Customization

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to complete


the steps for a Category 1 customization of the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 2


Category 1 Customization: Adding Columns to
Existing Fact or Dimension Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In a Category 1 customization, you add additional columns


from source systems that have prepackaged adapters and load
the data into existing Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
tables.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A Category 1 customization is one of the three customization types that were initially
presented in the previous lesson titled Customizing the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse. Customizations are categorized based on the data source (packaged or
nonpackaged) and the desired Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW) modification
(additional columns, tables, or rows). Category 1 customizations involve extracting additional
columns from source systems that are already mapped and loading the data into existing data
warehouse tables.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 3


Category 1 Customization: Scenario
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Scenario: Extract data from a column in a table in the


source database and load it into a custom column in a
dimension table in the OBAW.
Example:
Use the DESCRIPTION column in the HZ_LOCATIONS table
in the source system to capture data related to locations.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Load the data into a custom column, X_DESCRIPTION, in
the W_GEO_D dimension table in the data warehouse.

OLTP OBAW OBAW

HZ_LOCATIONS W_GEO_DS W_GEO_D


DESCRIPTION X_DESCRIPTION X_DESCRIPTION

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide presents the scenario for a Category 1 customization used in this lesson. Data is
extracted from a table in a source transactional database and loaded into a custom column in
a dimension table in the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse. This scenario is used
throughout the lesson and associated practices.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 4


Category 1 Customization Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Create custom SDE and SIL folders in ODI Studio.


2. Create a version of the task folder to be customized.
3. Copy the preconfigured task folder to the custom folder.
4. Create versions of the copied task folder.
5. Create versions of the model.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


6. Edit the target datastores.
7. Map the new column in the interface.
8. Generate DDL scripts.
9. Execute the DDL procedure.
10. Modify the scenario naming convention.
11. Generate scenarios.
12. Generate a load plan.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide and the next list the steps to perform a Category 1 customization. Each step is
presented in detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 5


Category 1 Customization Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

13. Open the generated load plan.


14. Update the load plan step.
15. Execute the load plan.
16. Verify that the data is loaded.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 6


1. Create Custom SDE and SIL Folders
in ODI Studio.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

On the Designer tab in ODI Studio, select BI Apps Project >


Mappings > New Sub-Folder to create custom SDE and SIL
folders.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Custom folder for a
preconfigured SDE adaptor

Custom folder
for SIL objects

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

If you want to make changes to preconfigured ODI objects, you must create a custom folder
and make the changes in it. Do not change objects in any of the preconfigured folders unless
explicitly directed by Oracle. This is because preconfigured folders and the objects within
them may be overwritten in future upgrades.
The preconfigured ODI repository does not include any custom folders. You must create your
own. You should create a custom folder for each prepackaged SDE Adaptor folder you have
deployed that will have customizations. In the example in the slide, a custom folder is created
for the SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor folder.
You should also create a separate custom folder for customizations that you want to make to
objects in the SILOS folder. Do not store customized SDE and SIL objects in the same folder.
The customization steps in the slides that follow use SDE objects as examples. The steps
apply to SIL objects as well.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 7


2. Create a Version of the Task Folder
to be Customized.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you begin customization, create a version of the


preconfigured task folder to be customized.

Accept the default


version number.

Add a description indicating that this

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


is the original version of this task.
Right-click and select
Version > Create Version.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Before you begin customization, enable versioning for the preconfigured task folder to be
customized. The version comment should indicate that this is the base (original) version of the
task. Subsequent patches applied to this task in the future would require increasing the
version in the comment so that it can be compared to the original task to identify any changes.
To create a version, right-click the task folder and select Version > Create Version to open the
Version dialog box. In the example in the slide, a version number and description have been
enabled for the SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations task folder.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 8


3. Copy the Preconfigured Task Folder to the
Custom Folder.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you begin customization, duplicate the task folder to be


customized by copying it to the custom folder.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copy the preconfigured task
folder to the custom folder.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Duplicate the task folder to be customized by copying it. Paste the copied task folder to the
custom folder, and rename it by removing the 'Copy of' prefix.
In this example in the slide, you copy the preconfigured task folder,
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations, in the preconfigured adaptor folder,
SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor, and then paste the copied task folder to the
CUSTOM_SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor folder. This creates a new task folder named Copy of
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations, which you rename to
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 9


4. Create Versions of the Copied Task Folder.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you begin customization, create versions of the copied


task folder to be customized.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Create versions of the
copied task folder.

Create an original version and a custom version.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Before you begin customization, enable versioning of the copied task folder to be customized.
The version comment should indicate that this is the original version. This versioning enables
comparison of the customized task to a copy of the original version to determine all changes
that have been introduced.
Create another version of the copied task comment so that it can be compared to the original
task to identify any changes. The version comment should indicate that this is the customized
version. To enable versioning, right-click the task folder and select Version > Create Version
to open the Version dialog box.
In the example in the slide, a version number and description have been enabled for both the
original version and the customized version of the
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations task folder in the
CUSTOM_SDE_ORA11519_Adaptor folder.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 10


5. Create Versions of the Model.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you begin customization, create versions of the model in


which the datastores to be customized exist.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Create versions of the model.

Create an original version and a custom version.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Version the model in which the datastores to be customized exist. Submodels and datastores
cannot be versioned. The version comment should indicate that this is the base or original
version.
Create another version of the model, with a version comment indicating that this is where
customizations are introduced. The models can now be compared to show differences. If the
model ever needs to be patched, the model should be versioned again so that the patched
version can be compared to the custom and original version.
The example in the slide shows navigation to ODI Designer > Models > Oracle BI
Applications (folder) > Oracle BI Applications (model). A version number and description have
been enabled for both the original version and the customized version of the Oracle BI
Applications model. This model has the datastores that you will customize in a later step in
this lesson.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 11


6. Edit the Target Datastores.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Before you apply customizations to a task, edit the target


datastores to include the required column.
2. Click the Add Column
icon to add a new column.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


1. Double-click the
datastore to open it
in the editor.

3. Set column properties.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Before you apply customizations to a task, edit the target datastores to include the required
column. In the example in the slide, you navigate to ODI Designer > Models > Oracle BI
Applications (folder) > Oracle BI Applications (model) > Dimension Stage and then edit the
W_GEO_DS dimension staging table to include the custom column, X_DESCRIPTION.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 12


7. Map the New Column in the Interface.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Double-click the interface


to open it in the editor.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Source Target

Column

Drag the column from


the source to the target
to create the mapping.

Click the Mapping tab.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Some task folders have multiple interfaces, each of which must be customized with new
mappings. The example in the slide shows how to map the custom column,
X_DESCRIPTION, in the W_GEO_DS interface for the
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations task folder. This assumes that a similar
mapping has already been completed for the W_GEO_DS_SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS interface,
which contains the source, SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS, for the W_GEO_DS interface.
To map the custom column in the W_GEO_DS interface, perform the following steps:
1. Expand Projects > BI Apps Project > Mappings > CUSTOM_SDE_ORA11510_Adaptor
> SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations > Interfaces.
2. Double-click the W_GEO_DS interface to open it in the editor.
3. Click the Mapping tab at the bottom of the editor.
4. Drag the DESCRIPTION column from the HZ_LOCATIONS source datastore to the
custom column, X_DESCRIPTION, in the W_GEO_DS target datastore.
Notice that the mapping indicates both the table and the column from which it comes:
SQ_HZ_LOCATIONS.DESCRIPTION.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 13


8. Generate DDL Scripts.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Generate DDL scripts to synchronize changes between the


ODI model and the data warehouse.

Select objects to synchronize.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


ODI generates DDL
scripts in a procedure.

Right-click the model and


select Generate DDL.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When a diagram or data model is designed or modified in ODI, it is necessary to synchronize


changes between the ODI model and the data warehouse. This operation is performed with
DDL scripts.
For example, you need to synchronize the X_DESCRIPTION custom column that you created
in the BI Applications ODI model with the physical tables in the data warehouse. The example
in the slide shows the steps to synchronize the X_DESCRIPTION column with the W_GEO_DS
table:
1. To generate DDL scripts, right-click the Oracle BI Applications model folder and select
Generate DDL.
2. When processing completes, the Generate DDL Editor appears with the differences
detected.
3. Click the check box in the Synchronization column for the objects that you want to
synchronize. The example in the slide shows a check box in the Synchronization column
for X_DESCRIPTION.
4. When you click OK to generate the DDL script, ODI generates the DDL scripts in a
procedure, opens the procedure in the editor in the right pane, and stores the procedure
in a designated location.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 14


9. Execute the DDL Procedure.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Execute the DDL procedure to run the DDL scripts.

Execute the procedure. Monitor the procedure.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Confirm the changes.

Procedure

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Navigate to the location in Designer where the DDL procedure is stored and execute the
procedure. Use the Operator tab to monitor the procedure and verify that it completes
successfully. Use a SQL query tool to confirm that the physical tables are modified as
expected. In the example in the slide, the X_DESCRIPTION custom column has been added
to both the W_GEO_DS dimensions staging table and W_GEO_D dimension table in the data
warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 15


10. Modify the Scenario Naming Convention.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Prior to generating scenarios, ensure that the Scenario Naming


Convention user parameter has a value of
%FOLDER_NAME(2)%_%OBJECT_NAME%.
Select ODI > User Parameters.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Modify the Scenario Naming Convention parameter.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Prior to generating scenarios, ensure that the Scenario Naming Convention user parameter
has a value of %FOLDER_NAME(2)%_%OBJECT_NAME%. This ensures that generated
scenarios are easily identified as custom scenarios because the custom folder is included in
the naming convention.
1. In ODI Studio, select ODI > User Parameters.
2. Scroll to locate the Scenario Naming Convention parameter.
3. Change the value to %FOLDER_NAME(2)%_%OBJECT_NAME% from the default value
%OBJECT_NAME%.
Newly generated scenarios now will be named according to the modified Scenario Naming
Convention user parameter.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 16


11. Generate Scenarios.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Generate scenarios for any new custom objects.

1. Right-click the custom task folder


and select Generate All Scenarios.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


2. Set scenario
generation parameters.

3. Scenarios are generated


for all underlying objects
using the naming convention
set in User Parameters.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When a component is finished and tested, you can generate the scenario corresponding to its
actual state. Generating a scenario for an object compiles the code for this object for
deployment and execution in a production environment. When a set of packages, interfaces,
procedures, and variables grouped under a project or folder is finished and tested, you can
generate a group of scenarios.
Generate scenarios for any new custom adaptors, using the option to generate the scenario
as if all underlying objects were materialized. The scenario will be generated reflecting the
custom adaptor name. In the future, if you make changes to any of the interfaces or the
package, you can either regenerate the existing scenario or generate a new scenario.
The example in the slide shows how to create a group of scenarios for the objects in the
SDE_ORA_GeographyDimension_HZLocations custom task folder.
In the Scenario Generation dialog box, select the Creation generation mode. This creates for
each object a new scenario with the same name as the last scenario version and with an
automatically incremented version number. If no scenario exists for an object, a scenario
named after the object with version number 001 is created. Select Generate scenario as if all
underlying objects are materialized. In the Objects to Generate section, select Packages,
Interfaces, and Procedures. Scenarios are generated for all underlying objects with the
naming convention set in User Parameters.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 17


12. Generate a Load Plan.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use known techniques to create and generate a load plan.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use the techniques you learned in Lesson 9, Managing Load Plans, to create and generate
a load plan. In the example in the slide, the GL Revenue SDE Custom load plan has been
generated successfully.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 18


13. Open the Generated Load Plan.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Open the generated load plan in ODI Studio Designer and


locate the step that you want to update.

1. Navigate to Designer >


2. Open the generated
Load Plans and Scenarios >
load plan in the editor.
Generated Load Plans.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


3. Use the Search field

4. to locate the step that you want to update.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Open the generated load plan in the Designer editor and use the search field to locate the
step that you want to update. In this example, navigate to Designer > Load Plans and
Scenarios > Generated Load Plans and open the GL Revenue SDE Custom load plan. Use
the Search field to locate the step
SDE_ORA11510_ADAPTOR_SDE_ORA_GEOGRAPHYDIMENSION_HZLOCATIONS.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 19


14. Update the Load Plan Step.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Update the load plan step in the generated load plan to


reference the custom scenario.

In the Property Inspector for the


step, update the Scenario field

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


to reference the
custom scenario.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 20


15. Execute the Load Plan.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use known techniques to execute and monitor the load plan.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use the techniques you learned in Lesson 9, Managing Load Plans, to execute and monitor
the load plan. In the example in the slide, the GL Revenue SDE Custom load plan has been
executed successfully.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 21


16. Verify That the Data Is Loaded.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use a SQL query tool to verify that the data loaded as


expected.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 22


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements about customization is not


true?
a. If you want to make changes to preconfigured ODI objects,
you must create a custom folder and make the changes in
it.
b. Preconfigured folders and the objects within them are

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


typically not overwritten in future upgrades.
c. The preconfigured ODI repository does not include any
custom folders.
d. You should create a custom folder for each prepackaged
SDE Adaptor folder that you have deployed that will have
customizations.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 23


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following should be versioned before beginning


customization?
a. The task folder to be customized
b. The copied task folder
c. The model
d. The target datastores

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 24


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You should not create a separate custom folder for SILOS


customizations. Store customized SDE and SIL objects in the
same folder.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b
You should create a separate custom folder for customizations that you want to make to
objects in the SILOS folder. Do not store customized SDE and SIL objects in the same folder.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 25


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Generate DDL scripts to:


a. Edit the target datastores
b. Create mappings in interfaces
c. Synchronize changes between the ODI model and the
data warehouse
d. Modify the scenario naming convention

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 26


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to complete the


steps for a Category 1 customization of the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse (OBAW).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 27


Practices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In these practices, you will perform the tasks for a Category 1


customization:
11-1: Enabling Versioning for an SDE Customization
11-2: Creating a Custom SDE Mapping
11-3: Enabling Versioning for an SIL Customization
11-4: Creating a Custom SIL Mapping

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


11-5: Generating DDL Scripts
11-6: Running a Customized SDE Load Plan
11-7: Running a Customized SIL Load Plan

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 11 - 28


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.


Building a Category 2 Customization

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to complete


the steps for a Category 2 customization of the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 2


Category 2 Customization: Adding New Fact or
Dimension Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In a Category 2 customization, you use prepackaged


adapters to add new fact or dimension tables to the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse.
Category 2 customizations typically require that you create
new source-dependent extract (SDE) and source-
independent load (SIL) objects.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A Category 2 customization is one of the three customization types that were initially
presented in Lesson 10, Customizing the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.
Customizations are categorized based on the data source (packaged or nonpackaged) and
the desired Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse (OBAW) modification (additional columns,
tables, or rows). Category 2 customizations involve using prepackaged adapters to add new
fact or dimension tables to the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 3


Category 2 Customization Scenario
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Scenario: Extract data from a table in the source database


and load it into a new dimension table in the data
warehouse.
Example:
Use the PARTNER table in the source system to capture data
related to partners.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Load the data into a new dimension staging table and
subsequently a new dimension table in the data warehouse.
OLTP OBAW OBAW

PARTNER WC_PARTNER_DS WC_PARTNER_D


PARTNER_NAME PARTNER_NAME PARTNER_NAME

PARTNER_LOC PARTNER_LOC PARTNER_LOC

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide presents a scenario and example for the Category 2 customization used in this
lesson. Data is extracted from a table in the source transactional database, loaded into a new
dimension staging table, and ultimately loaded into a new dimension table in the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse. This example is used throughout the lesson and associated
practices.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 4


Category 2 Customization Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Create new tables in the OBAW.


2. Import the custom tables into ODI.
3. Move the imported tables to the appropriate submodels.
4. Set properties for the datastores.
5. Create an ODI sequence for the dimension.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


6. Create custom SDE and SIL tasks.
7. Extend the fact staging datastore.
8. Extend the fact datastore.
9. Add a foreign key constraint to the fact table.
10. Add a non-unique bitmap index to the fact table.
11. Modify an SDE task to load the fact staging table.
12. Create a custom SIL task.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This slide lists the steps to perform a Category 2 customization. Each step is presented in
detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 5


1. Create New Tables in the OBAW.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Create a new dimension staging table and a new


dimension table in the data warehouse.
Use the prefix WC_ to help distinguish custom tables from
tables provided by Oracle.
Include the required system columns.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In this example, you run a DDL script to manually create a new dimension table,
WC_PARTNER_D, and a new dimension staging table, WC_PARTNER_DS, in the data
warehouse based on the standard data warehouse structure with the required system
columns.
When creating a new custom table, use the prefix WC_ to help distinguish custom tables from
tables provided by Oracle as well as to avoid naming conflicts in case Oracle later releases a
table with a similar name.
Notice in the example in the slide that the dimension staging table contains the required
columns: DATASOURCE_NUM_ID and INTEGRATION_ID. The dimension table contains
these two required columns as well as the required columns ETL_PROC_ID and ROW_WID.
INTEGRATION_ID stores the primary key or the unique identifier of a record in the
source table.
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID stores the data source from which the data is extracted.
ETL_PROC_WID stores the ID of the ETL process information.
ROW_WID is a sequence number generated during the ETL process, which is used as a
unique identifier for the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 6


2. Import the Custom Tables into ODI.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use reverse engineering to import the custom tables into ODI.


1. Open the model in ODI Designer.

2. Select the Reverse Engineer tab.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


3. Select Table.

4. Provide a comma-separated list of tables to import.

5. Click the Reverse Engineer button to start a session that imports the tables into ODI.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the set of practices for the previous lesson, Building a Category 1 Customization. you
manually created columns in ODI and then generated DDL scripts to define the columns in
the data warehouse. In this step, you use a different technique. You manually defined the
tables in the database in the previous step, and now you import the table definitions into ODI
using reverse engineering.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 7


3. Move the Imported Tables to the
Appropriate Submodels.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Imported tables are automatically placed in the Other submodel


and must be moved into the appropriate submodels.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When you use the reverse engineering technique, the imported tables are automatically
placed in the Other submodel and must be moved into the appropriate submodels. In the
example in the slide, the WC_PARTNER_DS dimension staging table is moved from the Other
submodel to the Dimension Stage submodel in the Oracle BI Applications model.
Note: The specific submodel that a table belongs to drives the table maintenance behavior.
For example, tables in the Dimension Stage submodel will always be truncated at each ETL
run, while tables in the Dimension submodel are truncated only during a Full ETL run. Do not
create a Custom submodel to place your datastores, because table maintenance will not be
implemented properly for tables in such a submodel.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 8


4. Set Properties for the Datastores.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Open the new datastores in ODI Studio Designer and set the
OLAP type.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Open the new datastores in the ODI Studio Designer editor and set the OLAP type. In the
example in the slide, the OLAP type is set to Dimension for the WC_PARTNER_DS datastore.
Other OLAP types include Slowly Changing Dimension and Fact Table.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 9


5. Create an ODI Sequence for the Dimension.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Create an ODI sequence for the custom dimension to populate


the ROW_WID column of the dimension.

Name the sequence.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Set the schema.

Provide the native sequence name.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In this example, name the sequence name to WC_PARTNER_D_SEQ. Generally, the Native
sequence name should match the ODI name unless this causes the name length to exceed
30 characters, in which case you can shorten the name to meet this limit. This is the name of
the database trigger created to populate the ROW_WID column.
You also need to create the sequence in the data warehouse. You can do that manually by
running SQL to create the sequence in the database, or use Generate DDL in ODI to
synchronize the ODI model with the data warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 10


6. Create Custom SDE and SIL Tasks.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Create custom SDE and SIL tasks to populate the dimension


staging table and dimension table in the data warehouse.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Create custom SDE and SIL tasks in the custom SDE and SIL adaptor folders to populate the
new dimension staging table and dimension table in the data warehouse. Creating custom
SDE and SIL tasks includes creating new task folders, interfaces, mappings, and packages.
You can use the SDE_ <Product Line Code>_SampleDimension and SIL_SampleDimension
tasks as a template. These sample tasks include the logic required to populate the system
columns.
In the example in the slide, the SDE_ORA_PartnerDimension task folder includes an
SDE_ORA_PartnerDimension package and an
SDE_ORA_PartnerDimension.WC_PARTNER_DS interface. These objects are used to
extract data from the PARTNER source table and populate the WC_PARTNER_DS dimension
staging table in the data warehouse.
The SIL_PartnerDimension task folder includes an SIL_PartnerDimension package and an
SIL_PartnerDimension.WC_PARTNER_D interface. These objects are used to extract data
from the WC_PARTNER_DS dimension staging table in the data warehouse and load it into the
WC_PARTNER_D dimension table in the data warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 11


7. Extend the Fact Staging Datastore.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Extend the fact staging datastore by adding an ID column.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The fact related datastores and tasks must be extended to reflect the new dimension. In the
example for this lesson, both the W_GL_REVN_FS fact staging datastore and the
W_GL_REVN_F fact datastore must be extended. The Oracle BI Applications Model should
already be versioned.
The example in the slide shows how to extend the W_GL_REVN_FS fact staging datastore by
adding an ID column that follows the naming convention X_<name>_ID with data type
VARCHAR2(80). In this example, the new column is X_PARTNER_ID. The next slide shows
how to extend the W_GL_REVN_F fact datastore.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 12


8. Extend the Fact Datastore.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Extend the fact datastore by adding a _WID column.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Extend the GL Revenue (W_GL_REVN_F) fact datastore by adding a _WID column that
follows the naming convention X_<name>_WID with data type NUMBER(10). In this example,
the new column is X_PARTNER_WID.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 13


9. Add a Foreign Key Constraint to the Fact Table.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Add a foreign key constraint to the fact table that refers to the
custom dimension table created previously.

Name the constraint.

Set Type to User Reference.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select the custom dimension table.

Expand the fact datastore and select


Select the ROW_WID column
Constraints > New Reference.
in the dimension table.

Select the custom


column in the fact table.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Add a foreign key constraint to the W_GL_REVN_F fact table that refers to the WC_PARTNER_D
custom dimension table created previously. The naming convention is FK_<Fact
Table>_<Dimension Table>.
In this example, the new constraint is named FK_W_GL_REVN_F_WC_PARTNER_D. The
foreign key constraint ensures that the custom SIL task is included in the generated load plan.
The custom SDE task is included in the generated load plan because it populates the staging
table that is used as a source for the custom SIL task.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 14


10. Add a Non-Unique Bitmap Index to the
Fact Table.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Add a non-unique bitmap index on the X_PARTNER_WID


column.

Name the index.

Select Not Unique Index.

Add X_PARTNER_WID.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select Defined in the
Database and Active.

Change value to QUERY.

Set the OBI Bitmap


Index value to Y.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Add a non-unique bitmap index on the X_PARTNER_WID column. The naming convention is
<Fact Table>_F<n>. In this example, the index is named W_GL_REVN_F_F99. Use the
Description tab to enter the name.
On the Columns subtab, add the X_PARTNER_WID column by using the shuttle button.
On the Control subtab, check the Defined in the Database and Active check boxes.
On the Flexfields subtab, deselect Default for OBI Index Type, and change the value to
QUERY from ETL. Confirm that the OBI Bitmap Index value is set to Y.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 15


11. Modify an SDE Task to Load the Fact
Staging Table.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Modify SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact to pass


PARTNER.ROW_WID to W_GL_REVN_FS.X_PARTNER_ID.

Add a lookup to retrieve


PARTNER.ROW_ID

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Create a mapping
using the lookup.

Create a mapping for the


fact staging target.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

In the example for this lesson, you modify a copy of the preconfigured
SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact task folder to pass the ROW_WID value from the PARTNER
dimension source table to the custom X_PARTNER_ID column in the W_GL_REVN_FS fact
staging table. It is assumed that the preconfigured SDE_ORA_GLRevenueFact task folder
has been versioned and copied to the custom folder in ODI Designer.
The first step is to add a lookup in the W_GL_REVN_FS_SQ_GL_REVENUE_EXTRACT
interface to retrieve the ROW_ID from the PARTNER source dimension table.
The next step is to create the mapping for the X_PARTNER_ID column in the
W_GL_REVN_FS_SQ_GL_REVENUE_EXTRACT interface. The mapping is to
PARTNER.ROW_ID via the lookup. Modify the mapping to convert the data type to
VARCHAR2: TO_CHAR(LKP_PARTNER.ROW_ID).
The last step is to map the X_PARTNER_ID column from the SQ_GL_REVENUE_EXTRACT
source to X_PARTNER_ID in the W_GL_REVN_FS target datastore in the W_GL_REVN_FS
interface.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 16


12. Create a Custom SIL Task.
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Modify the fact SIL task by adding logic to retrieve the


ROW_WID value from the custom dimension.

Add the dimension


as a source.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Define the mapping.

Create a join on the fact tables ID column and the


dimension tables INTEGRATION_ID column and the
fact and dimension DATASOURCE_NUM_ID columns.

Define the mapping in


the main interface.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Modify the preconfigured SIL_GLRevenueFact fact SIL task by adding logic to retrieve the
ROW_WID value from the WC_PARTNER_D custom dimension.
The first step is to add a new column to the SQ_W_GL_REVN_FS datastore in the
W_GL_REVN_F_SQ_W_GL_REVN_FS interface. The step for adding the column is not
shown in the slide.
The next step is to add the WC_PARTNER_D dimension as a source to the interface and define
the mapping on the X_PARTNER_WID column: WC_PARTNER_D.ROW_WID.
Next, create a join on the fact tables ID column and the dimension table's INTEGRATION_ID
column and the fact and dimension DATASOURCE_NUM_ID columns.
Finally, create the mapping in the main interface. Modify the expression to include a function
that defaults NULL values to 0: COALESCE(SQ_W_GL_REVN_FS.X_PARTNER_WID,0).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 17


Complete the Remaining Steps
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Generate DDL scripts to deploy the new ODI objects to the


data warehouse.
Define and generate new load plans.
Generate scenarios for the custom tasks.
Update steps in the generated load plans to reference the
custom scenarios.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Execute and monitor load plans to extract data from the
source and load it into the data warehouse.
Query the data warehouse to confirm that tables are
loaded with the expected data.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Use known techniques presented in previous lessons in this course to complete the remaining
steps to load the data into the data warehouse.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 18


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following are not required system columns for a


dimension staging table?
a. INTEGRATION_ID
b. DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
c. ETL_PROC_WID

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. ROW_WID

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 19


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following are not steps used to reverse engineer a


table in ODI?
a. Manually create columns in ODI.
b. Generate DDL scripts to define the table in the data
warehouse.
c. Manually define the table in the database.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. Import the table definition into ODI by using reverse
engineering.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 20


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You should create a Custom submodel to place your custom


datastores so that table maintenance will be implemented
properly.
a. True
b. False

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b
Do not create a Custom submodel to place your datastores, because table maintenance will
not be implemented properly for tables in such a submodel.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 21


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements does not apply to adding a


foreign key constraint to the fact table?
a. Add a foreign key constraint to the fact table that refers to
the custom dimension table.
b. The naming convention is FK_<Fact Table>_<Dimension
Table>.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. The foreign key constraint ensures that the custom SDE
task is included in the generated load plan.
d. The foreign key constraint ensures that the custom SIL
task is included in the generated load plan.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: c

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 22


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to complete the


steps for a Category 2 customization of the Oracle Business
Analytics Warehouse (OBAW).

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 23


Practices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In these practices, you perform the steps to build a Category 2


customization:
12-1: Creating a Dimension Table and a Dimension
Staging Table in the Data Warehouse
12-2: Creating an SDE Mapping to Load the Dimension
Staging Table

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


12-3: Creating an SIL Mapping to Load the Dimension
Table
12-4: Enabling Versioning for an SDE Customization
12-5: Modifying an SDE Mapping to Load the Fact Staging
Table
12-6: Enabling Versioning for an SIL Customization
12-7: Creating a Custom SIL Mapping

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 24


Practices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

12-8: Generating DDL Scripts


12-9: Running a Customized SDE Load Plan
12-10: Running a Customized SIL Load Plan

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 12 - 25


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Security

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to identify and


describe the security features of Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 2


Security Overview
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Business Intelligence Applications (OBIA) security is


tightly integrated with the Oracle Fusion Middleware security
architecture, which provides:
An authentication provider that authenticates users.
A policy store provider that provides access to application
roles and policies.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


A credential store that provides access to credentials.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Business Intelligence Applications (OBIA) security is tightly integrated with the Oracle
Fusion Middleware security architecture and delegates core security functionality to
components of that architecture.
Specifically, any OBIA installation makes use of the following types of security providers:
An authentication provider that knows how to access information about the users and
groups accessible to OBIA and is responsible for authenticating users
A policy store provider that provides access to application roles and application policies,
which form a core part of the security policy and determines what users can and cannot
see and do in OBIA
A credential store provider that is responsible for storing and providing access to
credentials required by OBIA

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 3


Tools to Configure OBIA Security
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

To configure security in OBIA, you use the following tools:


Oracle WebLogic Server Administration Console to
manage users and groups
Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control to
manage policy store application roles
Oracle BI Administration Tool to manage repository objects

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle BI Presentation Catalog Administration Page to
manage presentation catalog objects
Oracle BI Applications Functional Setup Manager to
manage OBIA offerings and modules

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

To configure security in Oracle Business Intelligence, you use the following tools:
Oracle WebLogic Server Administration Console: Use the Oracle Administration
Console to manage users and groups in the embedded Oracle WebLogic Server LDAP.
You can also use the Administration Console to manage security realms and to
configure alternative authentication providers.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control: Use Fusion Middleware
Control to manage the policy store, application roles, and permissions for determining
functional access. You can grant permissions to users, groups, and other application
roles.
Oracle BI Administration Tool: Use the Oracle BI Administration Tool to manage
security for Oracle BI repository objects. You can perform tasks such as setting
permissions for business models, tables, columns, and subject areas; specifying filters
to limit data accessibility; and setting authentication options.
Oracle BI Presentation Services Administration: Use Oracle BI Presentation
Services Administration to perform tasks such as setting permissions and managing
privileges for presentation catalog objects, including dashboards and dashboard pages.
Oracle BI Applications Functional Setup Manager: Use Oracle BI Applications
Functional Setup Manager informational tasks to set up security for OBIA offerings and
modules.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 4


Security Levels
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Security in OBIA can be classified broadly into the following


three levels:
Object-level security controls the visibility to business
logical objects based on a users role.
Data-level security controls the visibility of data.
User-level security refers to authentication and

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


confirmation of the identity of a user based on the
credentials provided.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Security in OBIA can be classified broadly into the following three levels:
Object-level security: Object-level security controls the visibility to business logical
objects based on a user's role. You can set up object-level security for metadata
repository objects, such as business models and subject areas, and for web objects,
such as dashboards and dashboard pages, which are defined in the Presentation
Catalog.
Data-level security: Data-level security controls the visibility of data (content rendered
in subject areas, dashboards, Oracle BI Answers, and so on) based on the user's
association to data in the transactional system.
User-level security (authentication of users): User-level security refers to
authentication and confirmation of the identity of a user based on the credentials
provided.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 5


About Authentication
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

OBIA installations use the embedded Oracle WebLogic


LDAP server for user and group information.
After installation, you can reconfigure the domain to use
alternative security providers.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

An OBIA installation is configured with a default authentication provider that uses the
embedded Oracle WebLogic LDAP server for user and group information. The default OBIA
policy store provider and credential store provider store default credentials, application roles,
and application policies in files in the domain.
After installing OBIA, you can reconfigure the domain to use alternative security providers, if
desired. For example, you might want to reconfigure your installation to use an Oracle Internet
Directory, Oracle Virtual Directory, Microsoft Active Directory, or another LDAP server for
authentication.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 6


About Authorization
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After a user has been authenticated, the next critical


aspect of security is ensuring that the user can do and see
what he or she is authorized to do and see.
Authorization for OBIA is controlled by a security policy
defined in terms of applications roles.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 7


About Application Roles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Application roles define a set of permissions granted to a


user or group.
Object-level and data-level security are implemented in
OBIA using application roles.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Application roles define a set of permissions granted to a user or group. Object-level and
data-level security are implemented in Oracle BI Applications using application roles.
Application roles are also known as duty roles.
Application roles are mapped to directory server groups and users. For example, the
application roles BIAdministrator, BIConsumer, and BIAuthor are default application roles that
are defined as part of an OBIA installation. Application roles represent a functional role that a
user or group has, which gives that user or group the privileges required to perform that role.
For example, users or groups with the BIAdministrator application role have the administrative
permissions necessary to configure and manage the Oracle Business Intelligence installation
and create and edit content for others to consume. Any member of the BIAdministrators group
is explicitly granted this role and implicitly granted the BIAuthor and BIConsumer application
roles.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 8


Advantage of Using Application Roles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

An application role can secure content in a way that is


independent of any particular authentication provider and
the users and groups within that provider.
If the underlying authentication provider changes, the
security rules persist.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

An application role is a logical role that can be used within the application to secure content in
a way that is independent of any particular authentication provider and the users and groups
within that provider. Security rules are built using application roles. If the underlying
authentication provider changes, the security rules persist. In a different authentication
provider, where group or usernames might be different, you could remap the application roles
to different groups or users, and the BI security structure (built with application roles) would
not be affected.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 9


Default OBIA Security Model
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

During installation, three OBIA security controls are


preconfigured with initial values to form the default security
model:
An embedded directory server functioning as an identity
store designed to hold all user and group definitions that
are required to control authentication

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


A file-based policy store designed to hold the application-
role and permission grant mappings to users and groups
that are required to control authorization
A file-based credential store designed to hold user and
system credentials such as username and password
combinations

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

When operating in a development or test environment, you may find it convenient to use the
default security model because it comes preconfigured. You then add user definitions and
credentials that are specific to your business as well as customize the default application
roles and permission grants that your business security policies require.
After the identity, policy, and credential stores are fully configured and populated with data
that is specific to your business, they provide all user, policy, and credential information
needed by the OBIA components during authentication and authorization.
The slides that follow cover the key components of the default security model.
Please note that the default WebLogic authentication provider is not recommended for
production environments. Configuring an alternative authentication provider is beyond the
scope of this course. Please refer to the Configuring Oracle BI to use Oracle Internet
Directory section in the Oracle Fusion Middleware Security Guide for Oracle Business
Intelligence Enterprise Edition.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 10


Default Security Realm
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use WebLogic Server Administration Console to access the


default security realm, myrealm, installed by the OBI installer.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


WebLogic OBI domain

Default security realm

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The default security realm is installed as part of the Oracle Business Intelligence (OBI)
Enterprise Edition installation. To view the default security realm, log in to the WebLogic
Server Administration Console. This console is used to manage users and groups for the
embedded LDAP server that serves as the prebuilt, default identity store. You also use the
WebLogic Server Administration Console to manage security realms, and to configure
alternative authentication providers.
On the left side of the console, under Domain Structure, notice that there is a single WebLogic
domain named bifoundation_domain into which all the OBI applications are deployed.
Notice that there is a single default security realm named myrealm. The OBI installer installs a
single domain with a single security realm in it. A security realm is a container for the
mechanisms that are used to protect WebLogic resources. This includes users, groups,
security roles, security policies, and security providers. Whereas multiple security realms can
be defined for the OBI domain, at any given time only one can be active, meaning designated
as the default realm.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 11


Default Authentication Providers
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Drill down on myrealm and use the Providers tab to view the
default settings for authentication providers.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Default authentication provider

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Drill down on myrealm to view settings for the default security realm. Use the Providers tab to
access the default embedded WebLogic Authentication Provider. An authentication provider
establishes the identity of users and system processes, transmits identity information, and
serves as a repository for identity information from which components can retrieve it.
Oracle Business Intelligence is configured to use the directory server embedded in Oracle
WebLogic Server as the default security provider. Alternate security providers can be used if
desired and managed in the Oracle WebLogic Administration Console, but the WebLogic
authentication provider is used by default.
Notice that there is a default WebLogic Identity Assertion Provider. WebLogic Identity
Assertion Provider is used primarily for Single Sign-On.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 12


Default Users
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Default users are provided as a convenience so you can begin


using OBI software immediately after installation.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

To view users in the WebLogic Administration Console, click the Users and Groups tab and
then the Users subtab. This page displays information about each user that has been
preconfigured in this security realm. The default identity store is pre-seeded with usernames
specific to Oracle Business Intelligence. These default usernames are provided as a
convenience so that you can begin using the Oracle Business Intelligence software
immediately after installation, but you are not required to maintain the default names in your
deployment. The default users are Administrator, BIAppsSystemUser, BISystemUser,
OracleSystemUser, and SADMIN.
Oracle Business Intelligence system components establish a connection to each other as
BISystemUser instead of as the Administrator user, the latter being the practice in
earlier releases. Using a trusted system account, such as BISystemUser, to secure
communication between Oracle BI components enables you to change the password of your
deployments system administrator account without affecting communication between these
components. The name of this user is the default, and it can be changed or a different user
can be created for the purpose of inter-process communication. This is a highly privileged
user whose credentials should be protected from non-administrative users.
Notice the weblogic user. This is the administrative user created during the installation
process for this training environment. This user is discussed in more detail in the next slide.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 13


Administrative User
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

weblogic is the administrative user created during the


installation process for this training environment.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A single administrative user is shared by Oracle Business Intelligence and Oracle WebLogic
Server.
This username is created during installation, can be any desired name, and, therefore, does
not have to be Administrator. The password is likewise provided during installation.
In the default security configuration, an administrative user is a member of the
BIAdministrators group and has all rights granted to the Oracle Business Intelligence
Administrator user in earlier releases, with the exception of impersonation. An administrative
user cannot impersonate other users.
An administrative user is also a member of the Oracle WebLogic Server default
Administrators group, which enables this user to perform all its administration tasks, including
the ability to manage Oracle WebLogic Servers embedded directory server and policy store.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 14


Default BI Groups
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Groups are logically ordered sets of users.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating groups of users who have similar system resource access needs enables easier
security management. Managing a group is more efficient than managing a large number of
users individually. Oracle recommends that you organize your users into groups for easier
maintenance. Groups are then mapped to application roles in order to grant rights.
In the screenshot, the Groups table is filtered to display the three default groups specific to
Oracle BI: BIAdministrators, BIAuthors, and BIConsumers. These default groups are provided
as a convenience so you can begin using the Oracle Business Intelligence software
immediately after installation, but you are not required to maintain the default names in your
deployment.
Members of the BIAdministrators group have permissions equivalent to those of the
Administrator user of earlier releases. Members of the BIAuthors group have the
permissions necessary to create content for others to consume. Members of the
BIConsumers group have the permissions necessary to consume content created by others.
Groups are nested in a hierarchy. Members of the BIAdministrators group are, by default,
members of both other groups. Members of BIAuthors are members of BIConsumers.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 15


Default OBIA Groups
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications also provides a sample set of default


groups.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications also provides a sample set of default groups (also called enterprise
roles).
In the screenshot, the Groups table is filtered to display the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager
E-Business Suite (EBS) group, which is member of the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS
role. You can associate this group to your BI users. Any users made members of the Fixed
Asset Accounting Manager EBS group will automatically inherit any security rights associated
with the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS role, and will have the correct security for
Fixed Assets Accounting reporting for EBS. Please note there are many other default OBIA
groups. The screenshot shows only one example.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 16


Default BI Roles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

An application role defines a set of permissions that are


granted to a user or group.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


obi application stripe

Filter by role name.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You use Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control to manage the policy store,
application roles, and permissions for determining functional access. Default BI application
roles include:
BIAdministrator: Grants administrative permissions necessary to configure and
manage the Oracle Business Intelligence installation. Any member of the
BIAdministrators group is explicitly granted this role and implicitly granted the BIAuthor
and BIConsumer roles.
BIAuthor: Grants permissions necessary to create and edit content for others to
consume. Any member of the BIAuthors group is explicitly granted this role and implicitly
granted the BIConsumer role.
BIConsumer: Grants permissions necessary to consume content created by others.
Any member of the BIAuthors group is explicitly granted this role.
BISystem: Grants the permissions necessary to impersonate other users. This role is
required by Oracle Business Intelligence system components for inter-component
communication.
The default application roles are mapped to default groups in the default WebLogic LDAP.
The groups are listed in the Members pane (not shown here). If you moved to a different
LDAP server, rather than the default WebLogic LDAP server, you could map these roles to
groups in the new LDAP server. Application roles are in the policy store, whereas groups are
in the identity store.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 17


Default OBIA Application Roles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle BI Applications also provides a set of default application


roles.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


The Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS group is a
member of the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS role.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The example in the slide shows the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS application role
and membership for the role. Notice that the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS group is a
member of the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS role. Any users associated with the
Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS group will have all the security privileges and
permissions assigned to the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS role. Again, there are
many other default OBIA roles and groups. The screenshot shows only one example.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 18


Default Configuration Manager Application Roles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

To access Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager or


Functional Setup Manager a user must be granted one of the
BIA_* roles.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

To access Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager or Functional Setup Manager (for


Oracle BI Applications), a user must be granted one of the BIA_* roles, including:
BIA_ADMINISTRATOR_DUTY provides access to all Configuration Manager (CM) and
Functional Setup Manager (FSM) user interfaces and system setup tasks for CM.
BIA_IMPLEMENTATION_MANAGER_DUTY provides users access to the CM
Overview page and the export and import of setup data. In Functional Setup Manager,
these users have access to Configure Offerings and Manage Implementation Projects
User Interfaces but cannot execute a setup task.
BIA_FUNCTIONAL_DEVELOPER_DUTY provides users with access to Configuration
Manager User Interfaces, except for the System Setup screens. In Functional Setup
Manager, these users have access to the list of functional setup tasks assigned to them
and have the ability to execute the setup tasks.
BIA_LOAD_PLAN_DEVELOPER_DUTY provides users with access to the Load Plans
page, where they can create, edit, delete, generate, execute, and monitor load plans.
Users with this role can view and edit fact groups, data load parameters, domains
mappings, and schedules associated with a load plan.
BIA_LOAD_PLAN_OPERATORY_DUTY provides users with limited access to the Load
Plans page, where they can view the generation status and execution status details of
load plans but are not able to modify them.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 19


Default Application Role Hierarchy Example
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This example is provided to illustrate the relationships among users, groups, application roles,
and permissions. In Oracle BI, the members of a default application role include both groups
and other application roles. The result is a hierarchical role structure in which permissions can
be inherited in addition to being explicitly granted. A group that is a member of a role is
granted both the permissions of the role and the permissions for all roles descended from that
role. When you construct a role hierarchy, you should not introduce circular dependencies.
The graphic in the slide shows these relationships among the default application roles and the
ways in which permissions are granted to members. The result is that, because of the role
hierarchy, a user who is a member of a particular group is granted both explicit permissions
and any additional inherited permissions. Note that, by themselves, groups and group
hierarchies do not allow a privilege to perform an action in an application. Those privileges
are conveyed through the application roles and their corresponding permission grants.
The table shows the role and permissions granted to all group members (users). The default
BIAdministrator role is a member the BIAuthor role, and BIAuthor role is a member of the
BIConsumer role. The result is that members of the BIAdministrators group are granted all the
permissions of the BIAdministrator role, the BIAuthor role, and the BIConsumer role. Only one
of the permissions granted by each role is used in this example.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 20


Default Application Policies
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The default file-based policy store is pre-seeded with


permissions specific to Oracle BI.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot in the slide displays the Oracle BIAdministrator application role and a partial
view of the default policies associated with the role. The default file-based policy store is pre-
seeded with the Oracle BIspecific permissions. All Oracle Business Intelligence permissions
are provided and you cannot create additional permissions. These permissions are granted
by the default application roles in the default security configuration. The default application
role hierarchy and permission grants can be changed as needed.
Please note that these permissions are not the same as those used to define access to BI
objects (metadata, dashboards, reports, and so on). Policy store permissions are only used to
define what BI functionality the assigned roles can access.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 21


Default Settings in the BI Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Open the repository in online mode to manage security


settings.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You use the Oracle BI Administration Tool to modify security settings for the Oracle BI
repository. You can perform tasks such as setting permissions for business models, tables,
columns, and subject areas; specifying filters to limit data accessibility; and setting
authentication options.
The screenshot shows the Identify Manager utility in the repository. On the Users tab, notice
that you can see the same set of users as those listed in the WebLogic Server Administration
Console. The key point is that users are no longer in the repository as in previous OBI product
releases. They are in the WebLogic LDAP or whatever identity store your system is
configured with. You must add a new user in the identity store, not in the repository.
On the Application Roles tab, notice that you can see the same set of application roles as
those listed in Fusion Middleware Control. You can now use the application roles to set
access control permissions for repository objects. The recommended practice is to use
application roles, not individual users, to set access control permissions.
Open the repository in online mode to see the default security settings. Repository security
should be managed in online mode.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 22


Setting Application Role Permissions in the
BI Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You can set permissions based on application role in the


Oracle BI repository.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


The Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS application
role has Read permission for these repository objects.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The screenshot shows the Object Permissions tab for the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager
EBS application role, which displays the repository objects to which the Fixed Asset
Accounting Manager EBS application role has been granted access.
For example, Financials Asset Balance is a Presentation layer subject area. This allows
users assigned to the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS role to access the objects in this
subject area for analyses and dashboards.
Notice that the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS role has been granted Read access for
all of the objects in the list. However, an Administrator could check out the objects for
editing and grant Read/Write or No Access to the objects.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 23


Setting Object Permissions in the BI Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You also can set permissions for a specific repository object


using the Permissions tab for the object.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


These users and application roles have
permissions set for this repository object.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This is another method for assigning permissions in the repository. The example in the slide
shows the permissions for the Financials Asset Balance subject area. Notice that, as
expected, the Fixed Asset Accounting Manager EBS application role has Read access for this
object.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 24


Permission Inheritance
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Permissions granted explicitly to a user take precedence


over privileges granted through application roles.
Permissions granted explicitly to an application role take
precedence over any privileges granted through other
application roles.
If security attributes conflict at the same level, a user or

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


application role is granted the least-restrictive security
attribute.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Users can have explicitly granted permissions. They can also have permissions granted
through membership in application roles, which in turn can have permissions granted through
membership in other application roles, and so on.
Permissions granted explicitly to a user take precedence over permissions granted through
application roles, and permissions granted explicitly to the application role take precedence
over any permissions granted through other application roles.
If there are multiple application roles acting on a user or application role at the same level with
conflicting security attributes, the user or application role is granted the least-restrictive
security attribute.
Any explicit permissions acting on a user take precedence over any permissions on the same
objects granted to that user through application roles.
Filter definitions, however, are always inherited. For example, if User1 is a member of Role1
and Role2, and Role1 includes a filter definition but Role2 does not, the user inherits the filter
definition defined in Role1.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 25


Permission Inheritance Example
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

User1
Member Role1
Member Role2

Role1 Role2

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


NO ACCESS TableA READ TableA
Member Role3 Member Role5
Member Role4

Role3 Role4 Role5


READ TableB READ TableC NO ACCESS TableA

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

User1 is a direct member of Role1 and Role2, and is an indirect member of Role3,
Role4, and Role5.
Because Role5 is at a lower level of precedence than Role2, its denial of access to
TableA is overridden by the READ permission granted through Role2. The result is that
Role2 provides READ permission on TableA.
The resultant permissions from Role1 are NO ACCESS for TableA, READ for TableB,
and READ for TableC.
Because Role1 and Role2 have the same level of precedence and because the
permission in each cancel the other out (Role1 denies access to TableA, Role2 allows
access to TableA), the less-restrictive level is inherited by User1. That is, User1 has
READ access to TableA.
The total permissions granted to User1 are READ access for TableA, TableB, and
TableC.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 26


Setting Data Filters in the BI Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


"SupplierSales"."Dim-Customer"."Sales Rep" = 'JOSE CRUZ' OR
"SupplierSales"."Dim-Customer"."Sales Rep" = 'ALAN ZIFF' OR
"SupplierSales"."Dim-Customer"."Sales Rep" = 'BETTY NEWER'

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Data filters provide a way to enforce row-level security rules in the repository. Data filters are
set up in the repository by using the Administration Tool and can be set for objects in both the
Business Model and Mapping layer and the Presentation layer. Applying a filter on a logical
object will affect all Presentation layer objects that use the object. If you set a filter on a
Presentation layer object, it is applied in addition to any filters that might be set on the
underlying logical objects. It is a best practice to set up data filters for particular application
roles rather than for individual users.
In the example in the slide, you set a filter on the Customer presentation table in the Supplier
Sales subject area for the SalesSupervisorsRole application role, so that customer data is
visible for only those records in which Jose Cruz or his direct reports are the sales
representatives.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 27


Setting Query Limits in the BI Repository
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Query Limits tab to:


Control the number of rows accessed by a user or role
Control the maximum query run time
Enable or disable Populate Privilege
Enable or disable Execute Direct Database Requests

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can manage the query environment by setting query limits (governors) in the repository
for users or application roles. It is a best practice to set query limits for particular application
roles rather than for individual users.
Notice that you manage the query environment by preventing queries from consuming too
many resources by limiting how long a query can run or how many rows a query can retrieve.
You also may want to regulate when individual users can query databases to prevent users
from querying when system resources are tied up with batch reporting, table updates, or other
production tasks.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 28


Setting Timing Restrictions
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Restrict access to a database during particular time periods.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can use the Restrict field to restrict access to a database during a certain time frame. You
can regulate when users can query databases to prevent users from querying while system
resources are tied up with batch reporting, table updates, or other production tasks. To restrict
access to a database during particular time periods, click the ellipsis () button in the Restrict
column to open the Restrictions dialog box. Then select a time period and click the start time
and drag it to the end time. To explicitly allow access, click Allow. To explicitly disallow
access, click Disallow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 29


Setting Catalog Object Permissions
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

1. Select an object on the Catalog tab.

3. View or set object permissions.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


2. Click Permissions.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can use the Catalog Manager to view or set presentation folder and presentation object
permissions for users and roles. It is advised that you use roles to manage permissions for
ease of management.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 30


Setting System Privileges
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use the Administration page to view and administer privileges


associated with various components of Oracle Business
Intelligence.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This page allows you to view and administer privileges associated with various components of
Oracle Business Intelligence. For example, the BI Consumer Role has the privilege to access
Oracle BI dashboards.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 31


Managing Catalog Groups
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

If you have proper authority, this screen allows you to create,


edit, and delete catalog groups, as well as remove catalog
users.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Creating a catalog group for the first time will automatically create a shared folder of the same
name for the group.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 32


Viewing Security Setting in BI Answers
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Use My Account to view a users assigned roles and groups.

Select user > My Account.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Select the Roles and
Catalog Groups tab to view
assigned application roles.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

You can use My Account in BI Answers to view the application roles and catalog groups
assigned to a user. In this example, the weblogic user has logged in to Oracle BI and
selected My Account. All of the application roles to which weblogic is assigned are visible
on the Roles and Catalog Groups tab.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 33


Oracle Data Integrator Security
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle Data Integrator (ODI) security is used to secure any


action performed by authenticated users against the
design-time and run-time artifacts and components of ODI.
Security is built around users and profiles, to which
security administrators grant methods (edit, delete, and so
on) on objects types (projects, models, interfaces, and so

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


on) or on specific object instances (BI Apps Project).
All the security information for ODI is stored in the master
repository.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 34


Managing ODI Objects
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

An object is a representation of a design-time or run-time


artifact handled through Oracle Data Integrator.
An instance is a particular occurrence of an object.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Instance

Object

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Examples of objects include projects, agents, models, datastores, scenarios, interfaces,


repositories, and so on.
An instance is a particular occurrence of an object. For example, BI Apps Project is an
instance of the Project object.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 35


Managing ODI Methods
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A method is an action that can be performed on an object.


Each object has a predefined set of methods.
Profiles are associated with methods.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Object

Method

Profile

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

A method is an action that can be performed on an object. Each object has a predefined set
of methods.
An example of a method is Create. In the example in the slide, the Create method is
associated with the Load Plan object.
Profiles are associated with methods. For example, the BIA_ADMINISTRATOR profile is
associated with the Create method for the Load Plan object. A profile is a set of privileges.
Profiles are discussed in the next slide.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 36


Managing ODI Profiles
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A profile contains a set of privileges for working with


Oracle Data Integrator.
One or more profiles can be assigned to a user to grant
the sum of these privileges to this user.

Profiles

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Profile
Object

Profile methods

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Notice the three profiles that begin with BIAthese are prebuilt profiles specific to Oracle BI
Applications. The remaining profiles (CONNECT, DESIGNER, NG_DESIGNER, and so on)
are built-in ODI profiles that the security administrator can assign to the users.
Notice the objects associated with each profile. In the screenshot, the Action object is
expanded for the BIA_ADMINISTRATOR profile. Notice the methods assigned to each object
within a profilethese are referred to as profile methods. A profile method is an
authorization granted to a profile on a method of an object type. Each granted method allows
a user with this profile to perform an action (edit, delete, and so on) on an instance of an
object type (project, model, datastore, and so on). Methods granted to a profile appear under
this profile in the Profiles accordion of the Security Navigator. When a method does not
appear for a given profile, this profile does not have access to this method.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 37


Managing ODI Users
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

A user is an Oracle Data Integrator user and corresponds to


the login name used to connect to a repository.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Notice that the BIA_ADMINISTRATOR profile is assigned to the weblogic user. This means
that the weblogic user inherits all the privileges granted to this profile. For example,
weblogic inherits the ability to create load plans.
Notice that it is also possible to grant privileges on specific objects for a user, although there
are no prebuilt examples of this for the weblogic user. A user method is a privilege granted
to a user on a method of an object type. Each granted method allows the user to perform an
action (edit, delete, and so on) on instances of an object type (project, model, datastore, and
so on). These methods are similar to the profile methods, but applied to users.
Notice that it is also possible to grant privileges on specific instances for a user, although
there are no prebuilt examples of this for the weblogic user. It is possible to grant users with
privileges on instances on specific work repositories where these instances exist. For
example, you may grant a developer user the edit privilege on the
LOAD_DATAWAREHOUSE scenario in a DEVELOPMENT repository but not on a
PRODUCTION repository.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 38


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not part of the Oracle Fusion


Middleware security architecture?
a. An authentication provider that authenticates users
b. An authorization provider that authorizes application roles
c. A policy store provider that provides access to application
roles and policies

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. A credential store that provides access to credentials

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 39


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which tools do you use to configure security in OBIA?


a. Oracle WebLogic Server Administration Console
b. Oracle WebLogic Functional Setup Manager
c. Oracle BI Administration Tool
d. Oracle WebLogic Server Presentation Catalog

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


e. Oracle BI Applications Functional Setup Manager

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, c, e

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 40


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following statements about application roles are


true?
a. Application roles define a set of permissions granted to a
user or group.
b. Object-level and data-level security are implemented in
Oracle BI Applications by using application roles.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


c. Application roles are also known as duty roles.
d. Application roles are mapped to directory server groups
and users.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, c, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 41


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not one of the three security controls


that are preconfigured during installation to form the default
OBIA security model?
a. An embedded directory server built around users and
profiles, to which security administrators grant methods.
b. A file-based policy store designed to hold the application-

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


role and permission grant mappings to users and groups.
c. An embedded directory server functioning as an identity
store designed to hold all user and group definitions.
d. A file-based credential store designed to hold user and
system credentials such as username and password
combinations.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 42


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to identify and


describe the security features of Oracle Business Intelligence
Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 43


Practices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

13-1: Exploring Default Security Settings for Oracle BI


Applications
13-2: Exploring ODI Security

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 13 - 44


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Managing Performance

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Objectives
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

After completing this lesson, you should be able to describe the


strategies for improving ETL and query performance in Oracle
BI Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 2


Optimizing Performance
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Performance tuning is a balancing act involving hardware, the


transactional schema, and the OBAW schema.
OBAW schema:
Indices can improve Indices, aggregates,
query performance, but minidimensions, and
could slow down ETL.
denormalized tables

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Adding hardware ETL and Transactional databases
resources comes at a query have their own tuning
relatively large cost. performance requirements.

Hardware: Transactional schema:


Processors, memory, Normalized tables and
storage, and network indices

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The graphic in the slide shows a performance triangle, which illustrates that performance
tuning is a broad topic that requires a balancing act involving hardware, the transactional
schema, and the OBAW schema. All three points of the performance triangle can be
bottlenecks, and performance enhancement in one area can have an impact on the
performance of another area. This lesson provides high-level recommendations for improving
performance related to ETL and queries in Oracle BI Applications. Real-world usage patterns
and ETL scheduling may demand further testing and tuning.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 3


Common Performance Bottlenecks
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Common performance bottlenecks involve ETL and queries.

Reads from Writes to OBAW


transactional source OBAW queries

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Oracle BI
Transactional ODI (ETL) OBAW server
DB

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This is a high-level overview of the three areas where bottlenecks occur. Bottlenecks can
include transactional or OBAW schema issues (for example, index usage) or hardware issues
(for example, number of processors, degree of parallelism, or I/O subsystems).

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 4


Performance Tuning Recommendations
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Tuning underlying systems


Guidelines for Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse
(OBAW) databases
Using a separate database for the OBAW
General guidelines for Oracle databases
Using Oracle template files

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Configuring base and installed data warehouse languages
Minidimension tables
Aggregate tables
Creating indices
Prune Days
Oracle GoldenGate

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Performance tuning recommendations for Oracle BI Applications, ETL, and the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse include the topics listed in this slide. Each topic is covered in
detail in the slides that follow.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 5


Tuning Underlying Systems
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Make sure that underlying systems are running optimally before


you initiate performance tuning:
Multiprocessor systems
Memory
Disks
Network links

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


OS memory management
Native ODBC drivers
Database server configuration

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Hardware and I/O subsystems can have a major effect on performance. The slide provides a
list of the system components that can be optimized before making major changes to the
OBAW or the transactional schema and should be considered while assessing ETL
performance.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 6


Guidelines for Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse Databases
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

The following guidelines will help you set up the data


warehouse physical database for performance and growth:
Allocate around 5070 percent of the total available server
memory to the database, assuming no other application is
running on the same server.
At a minimum, separate the data and index tablespaces.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Create more tablespaces to separate heavily used tables
and their indexes.
Oracle recommends using 8k block size for Oracle
warehouses.
If you are using multiple disk storage systems, stripe the
tablespace containers and files across as many disks as
possible.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

For more information about block size and Oracle databases, see the Oracle Database 11g
Documentation Library on Oracle Technology Network.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 7


Guidelines for Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse Databases
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Raw devices for tablespaces provide better performance


as compared to cooked file systems.
RAID-5 is known to give a good balance of performance
and availability.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 8


Using a Separate Database for the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Reasons for not putting the Oracle Business Analytics


Warehouse in the same database as the transactional
database:
ETL is configured to maximize hardware resources.
Therefore, the warehouse should not share any resources
with any other projects.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


The analytical queries interfere with normal use of the
transactional database, which is entering and managing
individual transactions.
The data in a transactional database is normalized for
update efficiency; transactional queries join several
normalized tables and will be slow (as opposed to
pre-joined, de-normalized analytical tables).

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Although it is technically possible to put the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse in the
same database as the transactional database, it is not recommended for performance
reasons. The transactional database is structured as an online transaction processing (OLTP)
database, whereas the Oracle Business Analytic Warehouse is structured as an online
analytical processing (OLAP) database, each optimized for its own purpose.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 9


Using a Separate Database for the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Historical data cannot be purged from a transactional


database, even if not required for current transaction
processing, because you need it for analysis.
This causes the transactional database to further slow down.
In contrast, the analytical database is the warehouse for
historical as well as current data.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Transactional databases are tuned for one specific
application, and it is not productive to use these separate
transactional databases for analytical queries that usually
span more than one functional application.
The analytical database can be specifically tuned for
analytical queries and ETL processing. These are different
from transactional database requirements.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 10


General Guidelines for Oracle Databases
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Recommendations for optimizing performance for Oracle


databases:
Oracle BI Applications on Oracle databases support only
binary sorting. If you are running an Oracle client, do one
of the following to ensure adequate performance:
Set the NLS_SORT parameter to BINARY.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Choose an NLS_LANG setting that includes binary.
It is recommended that you gather workload system
statistics.
To increase data throughput between Oracle BI Server
and the Oracle database, change SDU and TDU settings
in listener.ora.
The default is 2 KB and can be increased to 8 KB.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 11


General Guidelines for Oracle Databases
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

On the server side, in the listener.ora file under


the particular SID_LIST entry, modify SID_DESC as
follows:
SID_LIST_LISTENER =
SID_LIST =
SID_DESC = (SDU=16384)(TDU=16384)

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


ORACLE_HOME = /.....)
SID_NAME = SOLAP)
)
)

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 12


General Guidelines for Oracle Databases
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Set the number of log file groups to 4.


On the client side, in the tnsnames.ora file, modify
the TNS alias by adding SDU= and TDU= as follows:

myhost_orcl.world=
DESCRIPTION=(SDU=16384)(TDU=16384)

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST=myhost)(PORT=1521))
CONNECT_DATA=(SID=ORCL))

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 13


Using Oracle Template Files
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

To configure the OBAW on Oracle databases more easily, refer


to the parameter template file init11gR2_template.ora or
init11gR2_Exadata_template.ora, which are stored in
\<BI_Oracle_Home>\biapps\etl.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The parameter template file provides parameter guidelines based on the cost-based optimizer
for Oracle Database 11gR2. Use these guidelines as a starting point. You will need to make
changes based on your specific database sizes, data shape, server size (CPU and memory),
and type of storage.
Copy the appropriate template file into your <ORACLE_HOME>/dbs directory. Then, review
the recommendations in the template file, and make the changes based on your specific
database configuration. The database administrator should make changes to the settings
based on performance monitoring and tuning considerations.
The NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS parameter enables you to define byte- or character-length
semantics. Oracle BI Applications supports BYTE and CHAR values for this parameter. If you
are using MLS characters, you can add this parameter to the parameter template file
(init<DB version>.ora) for your database version.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 14


Configuring Base and Installed
Data Warehouse Languages
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

You should install only the languages that you expect to use,
because each installed language can significantly increase the
number of records stored in the data warehouse and can affect
overall database performance.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

After installing Oracle BI Applications, you use the Oracle BI Applications Configuration
Manager to configure which languages you want to support in the Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse. You must configure one base" language, and you can also configure any
number of installed" languages. Typically, the base language specified for the data
warehouse should match the base language of the source system.
The installed languages that you specify for the data warehouse do not have to match the
languages that are installed in the source system. The data warehouse can have more, fewer,
or completely different installed languages compared to the source system.
Note that for languages that match between the transactional system and the data
warehouse, the corresponding record is extracted from the transactional system; languages
that do not match will have a pseudo-translated record generated.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 15


Minidimension Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Are used to increase query performance


Include the most queried attributes of parent dimensions

Table Name Parent Dimension

W_RESPONSE_MD W_RESPONSE_D

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


W_AGREE_MD W_AGREE_D

W_ASSET_MD W_ASSET_D

W_OPTY_MD W_OPTY_D

W_ORDER_MD W_ORDER_D

W_QUOTE_MD W_QUOTE_D

W_SRVREQ_MD W_SRVREQ_D

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Minidimension tables, which contain subsets of heavily queried attributes of parent


dimensions, accrue benefits by segregating these attributes in their own tables. They improve
query performance because the database does not need to join the fact tables with the big
parent dimensions but can join these small tables with the fact tables instead.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 16


Aggregate Tables
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Can dramatically improve query performance


Summarize detail-level facts at a higher level
Are identified with the suffix _A
Examples:
Daily to yearly sales
Sum the fact data by date or sales region

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Base Fact Table Aggregate Table


DayTime_ID Month_ID
Store_ID
Region_ID
Customer_ID
Sale_$
Sale_$
5 million rows 100,000 rows

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

One of the main uses of a data warehouse is to sum up fact data with respect to a given
dimension, for example, by date or by sales region. Performing this summation on demand is
resource-intensive, and slows down response time. The Oracle Business Analytics
Warehouse precalculates some of these sums and stores the information in aggregate tables
to speed up response time. In the Oracle Business Analytics Warehouse, the aggregate
tables have been suffixed with _A.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 17


Creating Indices
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

When customizing Oracle BI Applications and the OBAW,


define indices to improve query performance.
Create indices on all columns that the ETL uses for
dimensions and facts as in the following examples:
ROW_WIDs of dimensions and facts
INTEGRATION_ID

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
Flags
Staging tables typically do not require indices.
Carefully consider on which columns to put filter
conditions.
Inspect preconfigured objects for guidance.
Register indices in the appropriate ODI model.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 18


Prune Days
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Evaluate the performance effect of setting the Prune Days


parameter:
Setting a small value for the Prune Days parameter means
that the ETL will extract fewer records, thus improving
performance; however, this increases the chances that
records are not detected.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

The Prune Days parameter is used to extend the window of the ETL extract beyond the last
time the ETL actually ran and ensure that the records that may have somehow been missed
in an earlier ETL process are picked up in the next ETL.
Last Extract Date is a value that is calculated based on the last time data was extracted from
that table less a Prune Days value. Records can be missed in an ETL process when a record
is being updated while the ETL process is running and was not committed until after the ETL
completed.
You set the Prune Days parameter value in Oracle BI Applications Configuration Manager.
Setting a small value means the ETL will extract fewer records, thus improving performance;
however, this increases the chances that records are not detected. Setting a large number is
useful if ETL runs are infrequent, but this increases the number of records that are extracted
and updated in the data warehouse. Therefore, you should not set the Prune Days value to a
very large number. A large Prune Days number can also be used to trigger re-extracting
records that were previously processed but have not changed. The value for Prune Days
should never be set to 0.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 19


Oracle GoldenGate
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Oracle GoldenGate is a data replication tool that you can use to


create a replicated OLTP schema or schemas, facilitate change
data capture, and aid in ETL and transactional system
performance.
Provides an OLTP-mirrored schema on the OBAW
database instance using replication

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


This replicated source-dependent schema (SDS) is then
used as a source during ETL.
Provides less network I/O during ETL because the source
data for extract is in the same physical instance/machine
as the OBAW target tables
Shortens the length of time that ETL takes by minimizing
impact to the OLTP database

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications can optionally leverage Oracle GoldenGate. Implementing Oracle


GoldenGate is not covered in detail in this course. For more information, refer to the section
Administering Oracle GoldenGate and Source Dependent Schemas in Oracle Fusion
Middleware Administrator's Guide for Oracle Business Intelligence Applications.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 20


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following is not a recommended guideline for


improving performance in the data warehouse physical
database?
a. Allocate around 5070 percent of the total available server
memory to the database, assuming no other application is
running on the same server.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


b. At a minimum, combine the data and index tablespaces.
c. Create more tablespaces to separate heavily used tables
and their indexes.
d. Use 8k block size for Oracle warehouses.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: b

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 21


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Which of the following are reasons for not putting the Oracle
Business Analytics Warehouse in the same database as the
transactional database?
a. The analytical queries interfere with normal use of the
transactional database.
b. The data in a transactional database is normalized for

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


update efficiency.
c. Transactional databases are tuned for multiple
applications.
d. The analytical database can be specifically tuned for the
analytical queries and ETL processing.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 22


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

How does Oracle GoldenGate help to improve ETL and


transactional system performance?
a. Provides an OLTP-mirrored schema on the OBAW
database instance using replication
b. Provides less network I/O during ETL because the source
data for extract is in the same physical instance/machine

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


as the OBAW target tables
c. Precalculates sums and stores the information in
aggregate tables to speed up response time
d. Shortens the length of time that ETL takes by minimizing
impact to the OLTP database

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: a, b, d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 23


Quiz
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Identify the incorrect statement about minidimension tables.


a. Contain subsets of heavily queried attributes of parent
dimensions
b. Improve query performance because the database does
not need to join the fact tables with the parent dimensions
c. Include the most queried attributes of parent dimensions

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


d. Summarize detail-level facts at a higher level

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Answer: d

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 24


Summary
These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

In this lesson, you should have learned how to describe


strategies for improving ETL and query performance in Oracle
BI Applications.

Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.


Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 25


These eKit materials are to be used ONLY by you for the express purpose SELF STUDY. SHARING THE FILE IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.

Practice

There are no practices for this lesson.

Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle BI Applications 11g: Implementation Using ODI 14 - 26


Oracle University and (Oracle Corporation) use only.

Você também pode gostar